JP2019107124A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To recover easily deviation of inclination of a nail without requiring much experience or an exclusive adjustment instrument, concerning adjustment of the nail.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game board for constituting a game area where a game ball is circulated, a nail provided on the surface of the game board, for changing circulation of the game ball, and a mark for regulating an angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 17

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, etc. Technical improvement is performed from various viewpoints, such as presentation (for example, patent document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detection and deterrence of illegal actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP, 2011-172988, A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a more healthy gaming, etc. Improvement of technology is desired.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following modes.

[Form] (this form is mainly based on the following first embodiment)
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the distribution of gaming balls;
A mark that defines an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the nail inclination.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface by which the fluctuation display is carried out in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the various counters used for a win | win lottery etc. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table memory area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly illustrating an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st starting opening and its periphery It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows a prior art example. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 1 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 2 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 3 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 4 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 5 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 6 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and the 1st starting opening with which a pachinko machine of modification 7 is equipped. It is a perspective view which shows a pair of nail and the 1st starting opening with which the pachinko machine of modification 8 is equipped. It is a perspective view which shows a pair of nail and the 1st starting opening with which the pachinko machine of modification 9 is equipped. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of a first starting opening in Modification 9; It is a perspective view which shows the electrically-driven accessory with which the pachinko machine of the modification 10 is equipped, and its periphery. It is a perspective view which shows the electrically-driven character with which the pachinko machine of the modification 11 is equipped, and its periphery. It is a front view which shows the 1st movable piece of the electrically-driven accessory with which the pachinko machine of the modification 12 is equipped. It is a perspective view of pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment. 5 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining an ordinary motor-operated part 53; FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a win | win lottery etc. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success or failure table for 1st starting opening. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the second starting opening. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the yes-no table (the electric combination open table for success or failure table) used when performing an electric combination open lottery. It is explanatory drawing explaining the kind of support mode which the pachinko machine 10 can perform. It is an explanatory view explaining the mode to which a game ball circulates at the time of execution of low frequency support mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in which gaming balls are distributed when the high frequency support mode A is executed. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in which gaming balls are distributed when the high frequency support mode B is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing a flow of game in the pachinko machine 10; It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entering process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot / reach information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows change time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball insertion process for through. It is a flowchart which shows normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of change time. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of an end period end. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electronic component opening and closing processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows state memory processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for support mode production. 51 is a flowchart showing a game turn effect process. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of a production pattern. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 5 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a sorting mechanism 120 ordinary motor-operated part 53 and each start port in a modification 1; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode A in the first modification; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode B in the first modification; FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a sorting mechanism 120 ordinary motor-operated part 53 and each starting port in a modification 2; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode A in a modification 2; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high frequency support mode B in a modification 2; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 3, the common motor-operated part 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode A in a modification 3; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-frequency support mode B in a modification 3; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 4, the common motor-operated part 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high frequency support mode A in a modification 4; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode B in a modification 4; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 5, the common motor-driven goods 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high frequency support mode A in a fifth modification; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high frequency support mode B in a fifth modification; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 6, the common motor-operated part 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode A in a modification 6; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a high frequency support mode B in a modification 6; FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing an example of the configuration of a normal motorized prize 53;

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Application to other configurations:
D. About the invention group extracted from each above-mentioned embodiment etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to a first embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at each game play, jackpot win, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the front right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates the operation handle 25 (rotation operation), the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided to detect the amount of rotational operation of the lens by changing the electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The gaming ball is fired from the gaming ball launch mechanism to the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side in a front view of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball emission button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is emitted to the front of the game board with a predetermined emission intensity regardless of the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same shot intensity as when the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is fired by operating the gaming ball launch button 26, the gaming ball flows to the right of the gaming board in a front view and flows down the right side of the gaming board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can do so-called "right-hand strike". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and operates the game ball emission button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball emission button 26. Can be realized.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling main control of the game. The main control substrate is accommodated in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device is provided with a liquid crystal display for displaying a symbol and an image for effect.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a emission control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control to pay out the winning balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shot control device 80 plays the game ball so as to launch a game ball whose strength corresponds to the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Control the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 54, slope connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and gently sloping so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rails 55 having the above, the case rails 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rails 55, and the supply of gaming balls from the case rails 56 receive a predetermined number of gaming balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the dispensing device 71, are provided.

  The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted with respect to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. At each opening, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. The game balls entered in each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are at the above-mentioned individual openings formed in the gaming board 30. It is induced. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As illustrated, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entry member that forms a ball entry where game balls can enter, and a plurality of the game winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2) as a winning ball.

  The first starting opening 33 is a ball entry member that forms a ball entry where game balls can enter. The first start opening 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as a winning ball, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

  The second starting opening 34 is a ball entry member that forms a ball entry where game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as winning balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with a motorized jack 34a.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the motorized accessory 34a. Specifically, when the gaming ball passes through gate 35, main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball having passed the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after the passage. It is possible to enter the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery by the main control unit 60, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. In the open / close execution mode, the main drawing of the lottery by the main control unit 60 triggered by winning in the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, as a result of winning lottery is switched to open, the open / close door 36b is open In this mode, the closed state is repeated. That is, when the player wins a jackpot as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening 33, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode in which winning to the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the second starting opening 34, also when winning a big hit, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode in which it is possible to win the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. The game area PA is discharged through the mouth 43.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a is triggered by a winning on the first start opening 33 and a lottery is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or a display mode until the segment display performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or display as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when the winning lottery with the winning of the second starting opening 34 is triggered. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first holding display unit 37c and a second holding display unit 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having won the first starting opening 33 are held. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. Also, in the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having won the second starting opening 34 are held. The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game which continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game cycle is started.

  The special view unit 37, the common view unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as, for example, a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the first start opening 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on winning on the second start port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to display effects triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs display effects in the open / close execution mode etc. . Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory view showing a symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols showing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG. 4 (b) is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, the combination of predetermined symbols determined in advance is on the effective line L when the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a big hit. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of the symbol row, the number of effective lines, the direction of the fluctuation display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Here, the "game time" means that the variable display is ended after the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is started, the stop display is displayed, and the stop display is ended. That is, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one lottery for one special information every one game cycle. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol per one game cycle. After the segment display is variably displayed on any one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the predetermined information is generated in the liquid crystal display device 41 every one game cycle. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (so-called nails, scissors) 42 (42 a, 42 b) are provided above the first starting opening 33. Depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b, the probability of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 changes.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives a power supply of DC stable 24 V from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

  The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. “At the time of a power failure” includes not only when a commercial power failure occurs, but also when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is off).

  Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected with multiple detection sensors. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not the game balls flowing down the game area PA have entered each ball entrance, and the game balls are through gates It is determined whether the vehicle has passed 35. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the ball entry of the gaming balls into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric character object open lottery based on the ball entered into the through gate 35. Do.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start opening 34 , And the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34 b such that the electric combination 34 a is opened. In each gaming session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the opening / closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

  Further, on the transmission side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the result of the winning determination. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry into the first starting opening 33 is entered. If the player specifies a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls from the main control unit 60, and if it specifies a winning to the second starting opening 34, pays out one game ball A corresponding award ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls.

  A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball emission button 26 are connected to the emission control device 80.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , The presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the notice effect performed in each game time, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time which the combination of the symbol is stop-displaying is constant. Therefore, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined by determining the change time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 hits, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery whether or not to generate a reach when changing out a symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C5 is used for the electric combination opening lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the second starting opening 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is configured of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 sequentially, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are time-series in the hold information storage area 64b. Stored in

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 33, and the gaming ball in the second starting opening 34 Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the player wins a prize. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table in the yes / no table storage area 63 a (FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the winning lottery. The high probability mode is a gaming state started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery is relatively higher than that in the low probability mode. FIG. 7A shows a yes / no table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a yes / no table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, under the gaming state in which the win / fail table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the winning lottery, the number of random numbers for winning a big hit is 15. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), under the gaming state in which the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the winning lottery, the value of the jackpot winning random number is 30. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. The number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described next. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and the holding information at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 34 It is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by providing differences between the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (3) of the electrically operated part 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the opening and closing execution mode Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening and closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning on the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b is 10 It can be set to continue until it reaches one. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above-mentioned specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the open time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the game ball may be set to be awarded.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the open / close door 36b, the open limit time for one open, and the open limit number for one open are winnings on the variable winning device 36 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode. The open mode of the open / close door 36b is optional as long as the occurrence frequency of is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 36 may occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using the high probability mode for the high probability mode as a high probability table as the aspect of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the (2) opening / closing execution mode described above; It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using the success or failure table for the low probability mode. As described with reference to FIG. 7, in the case of performing the lottery using the high probability success or failure table, the jackpot is won as compared to the case of performing the winning lottery using the low probability success or failure table. The probability of doing is high.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the motorized role 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening and closing execution mode ends, the firing of the gaming ball continues in the same manner to the gaming area PA In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the motorized part 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the winning combination in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C5 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode In the low frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state may be set more frequently when the electronic winning combination is won, and one open time may be set longer. In the high frequency support mode, when the opening is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , May be set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing time for setting the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state which assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first start port 33 is higher than that of the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning to the second start port 34 is higher than the first start port 33. The probability of winning will increase. In the case of a high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the ball much because a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed when a winning on the second starting opening 34 occurs. Can.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time rather than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and, for example, The probability of winning the winning combination may be increased. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured in which the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed, the low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a short securing time may be easily selected or the average securing time may be shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured upon the execution of the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the average time of securing time is shortened and the probability of winning is increased, any one or any combination of conditions is applied to enhance the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to set multiple types of jackpots for the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a plurality of jackpot types are distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R as a jackpot type based on the first start aperture 33 Jackpot, 8R Normal Jackpot is set.

  In the 16R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit, the mode of the open / close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high frequency prize mode, and the lottery mode of the win lottery after the open / close execution mode ends (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode” Is also a high probability mode, and is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes a high frequency support mode.

  In 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the open / close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high frequency win mode, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode, The support mode after the end is the jackpot that becomes the frequent support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "6 to 23" is the 8R probability variation jackpot “24 to 27” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and “28 to 39” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the probability of becoming a probability variation jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", and the probability of becoming a jackpot normally is a jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39" It is 40 percent of the value of. In addition, the number and the value of the random numbers winning for the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next highest for the 8R probability variation jackpot, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start-up port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a jackpot type based on the second start-up port 34, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit , 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot is set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 12" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "13 to 23" is the 8R probability variation jackpot “24 to 30” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and “31 to 39” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, and the second This is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, the probability of becoming a probability change jackpot is 60% when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, and the probability of usually becoming a jackpot is 40%, the first starting opening 33 It is the same as the jackpot winning based on the winnings, but the 16R and 8R distribution has a higher probability of becoming 16R than the jackpot winning based on the winning at the first starting opening 33. It has become. In addition, the number and the value of the random numbers winning for the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

  As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot types of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting the winning of the second starting opening 34 among the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 to occur. When the result is out in the success or failure lottery, there is no transition to the open / close execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode or the support mode occurs.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type The MPU 62 further determines the stop display on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2 Determine the display mode. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described next. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 34 The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE, for reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 It is checked against the table to determine whether to generate a reach. However, as a result of the winning lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that some combinations of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit stop for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41 It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4 (b), first, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation in which the said reach line is formed, it becomes reach by performing the change display of a symbol in symbol row Z2. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the fluctuation time of the symbols of the liquid crystal display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the motor-operated product release counter C5 will be described. For example, the motor-operated product release counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether to control the motorized jack 34a in the open state using the stored value of the motorized jack release counter C5. For example, if C5 = 0 to 199, the motorized jack 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C5 = 200 to 249, the motorized jack 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

  The combination of one set of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first starting port 33, and the second hold area The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb corresponds to the hold information pertaining to the second start port 34, and these hold information is special to the present invention. It corresponds to information.

A3. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. In addition, the one part structures, such as a power supply device 85 (FIG. 5), are abbreviate | omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 are the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

A4. Configuration of first opening and life nail:
FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the first starting opening 33 and the periphery thereof. The X-axis positive direction in the drawing indicates the right side in front view of the game board 30, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right-left direction in a front view of the game board 30, the Y-axis direction indicates the up-down direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-back direction of the game board 30. The X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis are three axes orthogonal to one another. Hereinafter, the X-axis positive direction is referred to as "+ X direction", the X-axis negative direction as "-X direction", the Y-axis positive direction as "+ Y direction", and the Y-axis negative direction as "-Y direction" The Z-axis positive direction is called "+ Z direction", and the Z-axis negative direction is called "-Z direction".

  The first starting opening 33 is formed of a ball entry member that forms a ball entry opening 33a in which game balls can enter. Specifically, the first starting opening 33 has a hollow box shape, the entrance 33a is formed on the surface on the + Y direction side, and penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction on the surface on the -Z direction side. A drainage port 33 b communicating with the opening (not shown) is formed. The game balls entered from the entrance 33a are discharged from the discharge opening 33b through the first starting opening 33 and sent to an opening penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The first start port 33 is formed of a translucent resin member.

  As described above, a pair of nails 42 is implanted above the first starting opening 33. Hereinafter, the nail on the + X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is referred to as “first nail 42 a”, and the nail on the −X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is referred to as “second nail 42 b”.

  Each nail 42 provided in the pachinko machine 10 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b has a substantially hemispherical head 421 and a substantially cylindrical trunk 422. For example, it is integrally formed of a brass material. The body 422 extends straight and has a pointed tip, and a helical thread groove 422s (see FIG. 11) is formed in a part of the outer peripheral surface. The nails 42 are driven down to the screw grooves 422s in the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30, so that even if the game ball collides with it, it is difficult for the game board 30 to come off the game board 30 by an impact. Each nail 42 is driven by an automatic nailer. At least a part of each nail 42 may be configured to be adjusted in inclination as needed after being driven in by an automatic nailing machine.

  At least at the shipping stage of the manufacturer, each nail 42 is generally perpendicular to the plywood 30a. Specifically, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting opening 33 intersect at a right angle with the surface of the plywood 30a, that is, a small angle θ1 with respect to the + Z axis direction. , Θ 2 are inclined. The inclination angles of at least some of the nails 42 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are determined in order to match the ball-out rate and the winning rate to the design values. The inclination angles of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 11 is a view showing the pair of nails 42 a and 42 b and the first starting port 33. 11 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line 1-1 in FIG. 10, and FIG. 11 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line 2-2 in FIG. That is, FIG. 11A shows the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the first starting opening 33 viewed from the + Y direction side (upper side) to the −Y direction side (lower side) (FIG. 11A) Hereinafter, it is simply referred to as “when viewed from the upper side”. FIG. 11B shows the pair of nails 42a and 42b and the first starting opening 33 viewed from the + X direction side (right side) to the −X direction side (left side) (hereinafter simply referred to as “viewed from the right side (Also referred to as “case”). In FIG. 11 (b), the second nail 42 b located on the left side is hidden from view by the first nail 42 a located on the right side.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when viewed from the upper side, the first nail 42a positioned on the right side has the central axis direction of the body 422 based on the tip 423 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the right (+ X direction) by the first angle θ1. In terms of a general angle, the first nail 42 a is provided so as to be inclined by + θ1 (θ1 counterclockwise) with respect to the + Z direction.

  In general, the pachinko machine 10 has been tested for equipment performance, and it is assumed that equipment manufactured in the same model has almost the same performance, and installation permission in each pachinko parlor is performed. The first angle θ1 is a predetermined angle which is determined in advance, and in this embodiment, is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The first angle θ1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees in the present embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the first nail 42a is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the first nail 42 a is provided along the Z-axis direction.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when viewed from the upper side, in the second nail 42b positioned on the left side, the central axis direction of the body 422 with reference to the tip 423 is from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) It is provided so as to be inclined to the left side (−X direction) by the second angle θ2. In terms of the general angle, the second nail 42 b is provided so as to be inclined by −θ2 (θ2 clockwise) with respect to the + Z direction. The second angle θ2 is a predetermined angle which is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment, is an angle when a type verification test is passed. The second angle θ2 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees in the present embodiment. In addition, although 1st angle (theta) 1 and 2nd angle (theta) 2 are equal in this embodiment, it may change to this and may differ. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are also angles intended at the shipping stage of the manufacturer.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the second nail 42 b is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the second nail 42 b is provided along the Z-axis direction.

  As a result of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b being inclined as described above, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b The distance (breadth) of each is gradually increased from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side).

  The ball entrance 33a of the first starting port 33 is an opening along the XZ plane, and has a trapezoidal shape as shown in FIG. 11 (a). Specifically, a first edge (edge) 331 corresponding to one of a pair of parallel sides forming a trapezoid and a second edge 332 corresponding to the other of the pair of opposite sides And the third edge 333 corresponding to one of the opposite sides of the other set constituting the trapezoid, and the fourth edge 334 corresponding to the other of the opposite sides of the other set, and the entrance 33a is Configured The first edge 331 and the second edge 332 are parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 (that is, along the X-axis direction), and the first edge 331 has an entrance 33a. The second edge 332 is located on the -Z direction side of the entrance 33a. The third edge 333 is located on the + X direction side of the ball entry port 33a, and the fourth edge 334 is located on the −X direction side of the ball entry port 33a. In addition, the 1st-4th edges 331-334 can also be said to be the inner slope surface of the ball entrance 33a in the case of measuring an inner method.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the first edge 331 is longer than the length of the second edge 332. Assuming that the angle on the + X direction side of the two interior angles at both ends of the second edge 332 is δ1, and the angle on the −X direction side of the two interior angles is δ2, δ1 and δ2 are as follows: The equations (1) and (2) of

δ1 = θ1 + 90 degrees (1)
δ 2 = θ 2 + 90 degrees (2)
Here, θ 1 is the inclination angle of the first nail 42 a described above, and θ 2 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42 b described above.

  According to the equation (1), it is understood that the third edge 333 has a configuration in which the direction based on the end on the -Z direction side is inclined from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction) by the first angle θ1. . According to the equation (2), the fourth edge 334 has a configuration in which the direction based on the end on the -Z direction side is inclined from the + Z direction to the left side (-X direction) by the second angle θ2 I understand. The distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a gradually becomes wider from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side) There is.

  Therefore, the third lip 333 of the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the entrance 33a of the first starting opening 33 is the trunk 422 of the first nail 42a. And the fourth lip 334 is parallel to the central axial direction of the body 422 of the second nail 42b. In other words, the third lip 333 is the inclination angle of the first nail 42a, that is, the angle between the first nail 42a and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the perpendicular direction of the surface of the plywood 30a Of the second nail 42b, that is, the angle between the second nail 42b and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the surface of the plywood 30a). Define the angle with the perpendicular direction of

A5. Operation and Effect of Embodiment The first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting opening 33 are inclined due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation, for example. The condition may differ from the manufacturer's intended size.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing a conventional example. In the conventional example, the same first nail 42a as that of the first embodiment is used. As described above, at the time of shipping, the first nail 42a is inclined at the first angle θ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right (+ X direction). As in the first embodiment, a first starting port P33 is provided below the first nail 42a (in the -Y direction). The first starting opening P33 is different from the first starting opening 33 of the first embodiment in that the ball entrance P33a has a rectangular shape. That is, in the conventional example, the third edge P93 of the entrance P33a is parallel to the direction (Z-axis direction) perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30.

  In the pachinko machine of the conventional example, the inclination of the first nail 42a changes from the shipping time as shown by a broken line (42a ') in the figure, for example, due to accidental impact during transportation, aging or the like. I had a problem. In that case, the repairer needs to return to the first angle θ which is the shipping angle. However, it is difficult for the repairer to grasp how much the first angle θ is inclined from the pachinko machine whose tilt of the nail has changed, and in the case of the conventional pachinko machine, the repairer is I had imposed a lot of experience in coordination and the use of dedicated adjustment equipment.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the entrance 33a of the first starting opening 33 is matched with the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b intended by the manufacturer which is the angle at the time of shipping. The orientations of the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in FIG. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the first nail 42a has the third lip 333 and the third nail 333 when viewed from the upper side by relying on the third lip 333 and the fourth lip 334 at the entrance 33a. By checking and correcting the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the fourth lip 334 so as to be parallel, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b is It can be easily returned to the intended inclination. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination deviation of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail 42 and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first and second ball entrances 33a of the first starting opening 33 are used without providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail separately. Since the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b can be repaired, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  As a modification of the first embodiment, a third edge 333 defining the inclination angle of the first nail 42a and a fourth edge 334 defining the inclination angle of the second nail 42b The color may be colored in different colors. According to this configuration, the repairer should easily recognize that the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 become the reference for repairing the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. Can.

A6. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In the modification described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as the above embodiment will be omitted.

A6-1. Modification 1:
The pachinko machine as the modification 1 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the nail and the shape of the ball entrance formed in the first starting port. The remaining configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the first modification, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment have the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 13 is a view showing a pair of nails 542 a and 542 b as a life nail provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification and a first starting port 533. FIG. 13A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, as viewed from the upper side. FIG. 13B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the first nail 42 a and the second nail 42 b is from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side) Gradually became wider toward the On the other hand, in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance (width) between the first nail 542 a and the second nail 542 b is from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side It becomes narrow gradually toward + Z direction side). Specifically, in the first nail 542a positioned on the right side, the central axis direction of the body 422 with reference to the tip 423 is the first angle φ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction) It is provided to be inclined. In the second nail 542b located on the left side, the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined by the second angle φ2 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right (+ X direction) Provided in The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are predetermined angles determined in advance, and in the present embodiment, are angles when the type verification test is passed. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees. Although the first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are equal, they may be different instead of this.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33 a formed in the first starting opening 33 is the rear It was the composition which becomes wide gradually toward the front side (+ Z direction side) from the side (-Z direction side). On the other hand, in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance between the third lip 593 and the fourth lip 594 at the entrance 533 a formed in the first starting opening 533 ) Gradually narrows from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). Specifically, the third edge 593 located on the right side has a configuration in which the direction based on the end on the -Z direction side is inclined from the + Z direction to the left side (−X direction) by the first angle φ1. There is. The fourth lip 594 located on the left side is configured such that the direction based on the end on the −Z direction side is inclined from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction) by the second angle φ2.

  Therefore, also in the pachinko machine of the first modification, the first and second nails 542a and 542b and the ball inlet 533a of the first starting port 533 are the first ball of the ball inlet 533a when viewed from the upper side. The third lip 593 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body 422 of the first nail 542a, and the fourth lip 594 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body 422 of the second nail 542b.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modification 1 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third lip 593 and the fourth lip 594 at the ball entry port 533a rely on Tilt the nails 542a, 542b so that the second nail 542b is parallel to the fourth lip 594 so that the first nail 542a is parallel to the third lip 593 when viewed from the top. It can be confirmed and corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination deviation of the first and second nails 542a and 542b without requiring much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment device.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail is not separately provided, and the first starting opening 33 originally present Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired using the entrance 33a, the configuration of the pachinko machine can be prevented from being complicated.

A6-2. Modification 2:
The pachinko machine as the modification 2 is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the nail and the shape of the first starting opening, and the remaining configuration is the same. It is. In the pachinko machine of the modification 2, the same name and code are assigned to the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing a pair of nails 642 a and 642 b as a life nail provided in the pachinko machine of the second modification and a first starting port 633. Fig. 14 (a) is a view corresponding to Fig. 11 (a) in the first embodiment, as viewed from the upper side. FIG. 14B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  In the first embodiment and the first modification, in the first nail 42 a and the second nail 42 b, the central axis direction of the trunk 422 with reference to the tip 423 is positive in the positive Z direction from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). Alternatively, it was configured to be inclined in the negative direction (right and left). On the other hand, in the second modification, in the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b, the central axis direction of the body 422 with reference to the tip 423 is positive in the Y axis from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is configured to be inclined in the direction (upper side). Specifically, when viewed from the upper side, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b extend along the Z-axis as shown in FIG. As shown in), the central axis direction of the trunk 422 with respect to the tip 423 is provided so as to be inclined at a predetermined angle μ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction). The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined angle which is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment is an angle when a type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined angle which is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment is an angle when a type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees, for example.

  In the first embodiment and the first modification, the ball inlet 33a formed in the first starting port 33 has a trapezoidal shape. On the other hand, in the modification 2, as shown to Fig.14 (a), the ball entrance 633a formed in the 1st starting opening 633 is a rectangular shape. Therefore, the third edge 693 and the fourth edge 694 on the + X direction side and the −X direction side that constitute the ball entry port 633a are configured to be along the + Z direction. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14B, the surface 633S on the upper side (+ Y direction side) of the first starting opening 633 is from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) from the end 633b in contact with the plywood 30a. It is configured to be inclined at a predetermined angle μ1 in the (+ Y direction).

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each torso portion 422 of the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b is the entrance of the first starting opening 633. It is parallel to the upper surface 633S of 633a.

  In the pachinko machine of the second modification configured as described above, the inclination angle of the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633 is equal to the inclination of each nail 642a, 642b intended by the manufacturer toward the upper side. It is determined in advance. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, the respective nails 642a and 642b are parallel to the plane 633S when viewed from the right side by relying on the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633. The inclination of the nails 642a and 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 642a, 642b can be easily repaired without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine of the modification 2, without providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail separately, the inclination of the nail is restored using the flat surface 633S of the first starting port 33 which is originally present Can prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-3. Modification 3:
The pachinko machine as the third modification differs from the pachinko machine as the second modification only in the inclination direction of the nail, and the remaining configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the third modification, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of the second modification have the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 15 is a view showing a pair of nails 742a and 742b as first nails and a first starting opening 733 provided in the pachinko machine of the third modification. FIG. 15 (a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 11 (a) in the first embodiment, as viewed from the upper side. FIG. 15B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 14B, in the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b, the central axis direction of the trunk 422 with respect to the tip 423 is in the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). Is inclined upward (in the + Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1. On the other hand, in the third modification, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the first nail 742 a and the second nail 742 b have the central axis direction of the body 422 based on the tip 423 in the + Z direction. It is the structure which inclines only predetermined angle (nu) 1 below (-Y direction) from (two-dot chain line). The predetermined angle 11 is a predetermined angle which is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment is an angle when a type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle 11 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees, for example.

  In the third modification, the ball inlet 733 a formed in the first starting opening 733 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. However, the upper surface 733S of the first starting opening 733 is different from the second modification, and a predetermined angle from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the lower side (−Y direction) based on the end 733b in contact with the plywood 30a. The structure is inclined by ν1.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the third modification, when viewed from the right side, the central axial direction of each of the first to fourth nails 742a and 742b is the ball entrance of the first starting opening 733. It is parallel to the upper surface 733S of 733a.

  According to the pachinko machine of the third modification configured as described above, similar to the pachinko machine of the second modification, each nail 742a when viewed from the right side, relying on the upper surface 733S of the first starting opening 733 , 742 b may be parallel to the plane 733 S, the inclination of each nail 742 a, 742 b may be checked and corrected. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the inclination deviation of the first and second nails 742a and 742b without requiring much experience of nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment device.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the third modification, the inclination of the nail is restored using the flat surface 733S of the first starting opening 733 which is originally provided without providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail separately. Can prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-4. Modification 4:
The pachinko machine as the fourth modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the nail and the shape of the first starting opening, and the remaining configuration is the same. It is. In the pachinko machine of the modification 4, the same name and code are attached to the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 16 is a view showing a pair of nails 842a and 842b as first nails and a first starting port 833 provided in the pachinko machine of the fourth modification. FIG. 16 (a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 11 (a) in the first embodiment, as viewed from the upper side. FIG. 16B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  In the pachinko machines of the first embodiment and the first to third modifications, the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, have the central axis direction of the body 422 based on the tip 423 in the + Z direction (two points It is a structure which inclines in any direction among the right side (+ X direction), the left side (-X direction), the upper side (+ Y direction), and the lower side (-Y direction) from the chain line). On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b, which are life nails, have the central axis direction of the body 422 based on the tip 423 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It was configured to be inclined in the following direction. The direction of this inclination is an angle which intersects both the X axis and the Y axis at an angle other than the right angle. Specifically, it has the following configuration.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the first nail 42a positioned on the right side is viewed from the upper side, the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is in the + Z direction. It is inclined rightward (+ X direction) from the (two-dot chain line) by the first angle θ1, and as seen from the right side, as shown in FIG. It was configured as. On the other hand, in the fourth modification, as shown in FIG. 16A, the first nail 842a positioned on the right side is the same as the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from the upper side. When viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. 16B, the central axis direction of the trunk 422 with reference to the tip 423 is predetermined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction) It was configured to be inclined by an angle ξ1.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the second nail 42b positioned on the left side has the central axis direction of the body 422 with the tip 423 as a reference when viewed from the upper side. The central axis direction of the body 422 is Z when it is inclined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction) by the second angle θ2 and viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. It was configured to be along the axial direction. On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the second nail 842b positioned on the left side is the same as the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from the upper side as shown in FIG. 16 (a). When viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. 16B, the central axis direction of the trunk 422 with reference to the tip 423 is predetermined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction) It was configured to be inclined by an angle ξ1.

  In the fourth modification, the ball entry port 833a formed in the first starting port 833 has a trapezoidal shape identical to that of the first embodiment. However, the upper surface 833S of the first starting opening 833 is different from the first embodiment and the second modification, and the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction) with reference to the end 833b in contact with the plywood 30a. Is inclined by a predetermined angle ξ1. The predetermined angle ξ 1 is a predetermined angle which is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment is an angle when a type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle ξ 1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees, for example.

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, the first and second nails 842a and 842b and the ball inlet 833a of the first starting opening 833 have the third lip 893, when viewed from the upper side. The fourth edge 894 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body 422 of the second nail 842b. In addition, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each barrel 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b is parallel to the upper surface 833S of the entrance 833a of the first starting opening 833. It has become.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modification 4 configured as described above, the first nail 842a is viewed from the upper side by relying on the third edge 893 and the fourth edge 894 at the entrance 833a. The tilt of each nail 842a, 842b can be checked and corrected so that the second nail 842b is parallel to the fourth lip 894 so that it is parallel to the third lip 893. Also, the inclination of each nail 842a, 842b is confirmed and corrected so that each nail 842a, 842b is parallel to the plane 833S when viewed from the right side, relying on the upper surface 833S of the first starting opening 833 can do. Therefore, the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 842a, 842b can be easily repaired without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first starting opening 833 originally present is provided without separately providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired by utilizing it, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-5. Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications, a reference portion serving as a reference for checking whether or not the first and second nails, which are life nails, are parallel when repairing the inclinations of the first and second nails. , A predetermined portion of the first start opening, for example, the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 of the entrance 33a shown in FIG. 11 or the upper surface 633S of the first start opening 633 shown in FIG. Met. On the other hand, in the modification 5, the above-mentioned standard part is constituted by the exclusive mark provided in the 1st starting opening. Details will be described below.

  The pachinko machine as the fifth modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment only in the configuration of the first starting opening, and the rest including the first and second nails 42a and 42b. The configuration of is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modification 5, the same name and code are attached to the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 17 is a view showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b as a nail in the pachinko machine of the fifth modification and a first starting opening 933. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, as viewed from the upper side. In FIG. 17 (a), parts of the first and second nails 42a and 42b are broken away for convenience of illustration. FIG. 17B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  As shown to Fig.17 (a), the ball entrance 933a formed in the 1st starting opening 933 is a rectangular shape similarly to the modification 2. As shown in FIG. The upper surface 933S of the first start port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. On the surface 933S, long rectangular marks 951 and 952 are printed. The marks 951 and 952 are colored by printing.

  In the surface 933S, the first mark 951 is printed on the right side with respect to the lip 993 on the right side of the entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 951 is parallel to the central axial direction of the body 422 of the first nail 42 a located on the right side. In the surface 933S, the second mark 952 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 is parallel to the central axial direction of the body 422 of the second nail 42b located on the left side. Moreover, when viewed from the upper side, the right side outline of the first mark 951 is located slightly to the right of the right side outline of the body 422 of the first nail 42a, and the left side outline of the second mark 952 Is slightly to the left of the outline of the left side of the body 422 of the second nail 42b. That is, when viewed from above, at least a portion of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a portion of the second mark 952 is not obscured by the second nail 42b.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fifth modification configured as described above, the first nail 42 a is the first mark 951 when viewed from the upper side by relying on the first mark 951 and the second mark 952. The tilt of each nail 42a, 42b can be checked and corrected so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 so as to be parallel to the longitudinal direction. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool. Also, when viewed from the upper side, at least a portion of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a portion of the second mark 952 is not obscured by the second nail 42b. , And the visibility of the first and second marks 951, 952 is high. Therefore, it is easy to identify the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b.

A6-6. Modification 6:
Another example in which the above-described reference portion is configured by a dedicated mark provided in the first starting opening will be described as a sixth modification.

  The pachinko machine as the sixth modification differs from the pachinko machine as the second modification only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails 642a and 642b. Is the same. In the pachinko machine of the sixth modification, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of the second modification have the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 18 is a view showing a pair of nails 642 a and 642 b as a life nail provided in the pachinko machine of the sixth modification and a first starting port 1033. FIG. 18A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, viewed from the upper side. FIG. 18B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  As shown to Fig.18 (a), the ball entrance 1033a formed in the 1st starting opening 1033 is a rectangular shape similarly to the modification 2. As shown in FIG. The upper surface 1033S of the first start port 1033 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 1051 is printed on the side surface 1033 T on the right side of the first starting opening 1033.

  When viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body 422 of the first nail 642 a located on the right side. The mark 1051 is colored by printing.

  According to the pachinko machine of the sixth modification configured as described above, the nails 642a are arranged so that the nails 642a and 642b are parallel to the longitudinal direction of the marks 1051 when viewed from the right side by using the marks 1051. , 642b can be checked and corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 642a and 642b without requiring much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment device.

  The first mark 951, the second mark 952 in the fifth modification, and the mark 1051 in the sixth modification are changed to those colored by printing, and an unevenness is provided on the surface of the first starting port 1033. It is good. Specifically, it may be changed to a rib, a recess, a step or the like. Further, the shape of the mark does not have to be limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as it can define the direction. For example, an arrow symbol or two points indicating a base point and an end point may be used.

A6-7. Modification 7:
The pachinko machine as the seventh modification differs from the pachinko machine as the fifth modification only in the orientation of the first mark and the second mark, and the first and second nails 42a and 42b. The remaining configuration including the shape of the first start port 933 is the same as that of the first start port 933. In the pachinko machine of the seventh modification, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of the fifth modification have the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 19 is a view showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b as a life nail provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 7 and a first starting opening 933. FIG. 19A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, as viewed from the upper side. In FIG. 19 (a), parts of the first and second nails 42a and 42b are broken away for convenience of illustration. FIG. 19B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, as viewed from the right.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the first starting opening 933 is the same as that of the fifth modification. The ball entrance 933a of the first start port 933 has a rectangular shape, and the upper surface 933S of the first start port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. On the face 933S, long rectangular marks 1151 and 1152 are printed.

  In the surface 933S, the first mark 1151 is printed on the right side with respect to the lip 993 on the right side of the entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. That is, the first mark 1151 is printed on the plywood 30 a with its longitudinal direction guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. In the present embodiment, by printing the first right-angle mark 1153 indicating that it is perpendicular, at a glance, the first mark 1151 may be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. It is made to show that it is guaranteed.

  In the surface 933S, the second mark 1152 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. That is, the second mark 1152 is printed on the plywood 30 a with its longitudinal direction guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. In the present embodiment, by printing the second right-angle mark 1154 indicating that it is perpendicular, at a glance, the second mark 1152 may be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. It is made to show that it is guaranteed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), by printing a third right-angled mark 1155 on the right side of the first starting opening 933, the upper surface 933 S of the first starting opening 933 is the gaming board 30. It may be understood that it is guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a which constitutes it. The first to third right angle marks 1153 to 1155 are not necessarily required, and may be omitted.

  According to the pachinko machine of the seventh modification configured as described above, the inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed by relying on the first mark 1151, and the second mark 1152 is relied upon to The inclination degree of the nail 42a can be confirmed. Specifically, by comparing the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 with the direction of the first nail 42a, and comparing the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 with the direction of the second nail 42b, The degree of inclination of the second nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed. Therefore, adjustment of each nail 42a, 42b can be performed easily.

  As another modification, in the sixth modification shown in FIG. 18, the direction of the mark 1051 may be changed. Specifically, in another modification, when viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. That is, in the sixth modification shown in FIG. 18, the mark 1051 printed on the side surface 1033T on the right side of the first starting opening 1033 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 depending on the longitudinal direction. It is guaranteed that it will be converted to the configuration printed on plywood 30a. Also according to this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b in the vertical direction.

  The first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in the seventh modification are colored by printing, but instead, they may be provided with unevenness on the surface of the first starting opening to make a mark. Specifically, it may be changed to a rib, a recess, a step or the like. Further, the shape of the mark does not have to be limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as it can define the direction.

  In the seventh modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark described in the first start opening 933 are the reference parts for ensuring that the reference parts are provided perpendicularly to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. It was 1152. On the other hand, as a modification, in place of the mark, a protrusion made of, for example, resin may be provided separately from the first starting opening 933 and provided on the game board 30. The point is that any configuration can be used as long as it is provided to be vertically provided to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30.

  Furthermore, as another modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in the seventh modification may be added in the first embodiment and the first and fourth modifications thereof. According to this configuration, in addition to the third edge on the right side and the fourth edge 334 on the left side of the ball entrance, the inclination of the nail is also caused by the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 Since the condition can be confirmed, the nail can be adjusted more accurately.

A6-8. Modification 8:
The pachinko machine as the modification 8 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails. Are identical. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, the same name and code are assigned to the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be made.

  FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a first starting opening 1233 provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 and the periphery thereof. In the first embodiment and the first to seventh modifications, the first starting opening, for example, the first starting opening 33 shown in FIG. 10 has a hollow box shape and is formed on the upper surface (+ Y direction side). The ball mouth 33a has a first edge 331 on the front side (+ Z direction side), a second edge 332 on the rear side (−Z direction side), a third edge 333 on the right side (+ X direction side), and a left side. It is comprised by the 4th edge 334 of (-X direction side). On the other hand, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 20, the first starting port 1233 has a hollow box shape in which the wall surface on the rear side (−Z direction side) is removed. That is, the upper end surface of the first start port 1233 is substantially U-shaped.

  The ball entrance 1233a formed on the upper surface (+ Y direction side) of the first starting opening 1233 has a first edge 1291 on the front side (+ Z direction side) and a second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side). And the third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side) and a part of the surface of the plywood 30 a. The game ball entered from the entrance 1233a is sent to the opening 30c which penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction through the inside of the first starting opening 1233.

  Similarly to the third edge 333 in the first embodiment, the second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side) is a direction from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction) based on the end on the -Z direction side. It is inclined by the first angle θ1. Similarly to the fourth edge 334 in the first embodiment, the third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side) has a direction based on the end portion on the −Z direction side is the left side from the + Z direction (−X direction) ) Is inclined by a second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are tilt angles at the time of shipment of the gaming machine with respect to the first and second nails 42a and 42b, as in the first embodiment.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, relying on the second edge 1293 and the third edge 1294 at the entrance 1233a, In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the inclinations of the nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed and corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  In addition, the shape of the first start-up port described above, that is, the shape of the first start-up port whose upper end face is substantially U-shaped is the modification 1 to 7 described above in addition to the first embodiment. May be adopted.

A6-9. Modification 9:
The pachinko machine as the modification 9 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the modification 8 only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails is different. It is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modification 9, the same name and code are attached about the same composition as the pachinko machine of the modification 8, and the following explanation is given.

  FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing a first starting opening 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of the ninth modification and the periphery thereof. Similar to the first start port 1233 in the eighth modification, the first start port 1333 has a substantially U-shaped end face on the upper side. In addition, the first starting opening 1333 is different from the first starting opening 1233 in the eighth modification in the following points (i) to (iii).

(I) As shown in FIG. 20, in the first starting opening 1233 in the modified example 8, the second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side) forming the entrance 1233a and the left side (−X direction side) The third rim 1294 is configured to be inclined from the + Z direction by the first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2. On the other hand, in the first start port 1333 in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 21, the second edge 1393 on the right side (+ X direction side) and the third edge 1394 on the left side (−X direction side) And are parallel to the + Z direction.

(Ii) In the first start opening 1333 in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 21, on the outer surface 1333 b of the right side wall of the first start opening 1333, the tilt angle of the first nail 42 a at the time of shipment of the gaming machine The first numerical information Na indicating the first angle θ1 which is the first angle θ1 is described, which is an inclination angle at the time of shipment of the gaming machine with respect to the second nail 42b on the inner surface 1333c of the side wall on the left side of the first starting opening 1333 The second numerical information Nb indicating the second angle θ2 is described. On the other hand, the first starting opening 1233 in the eighth modification does not have such a configuration. The first numerical value information Na and the second numerical value information Nb are numerical values indicating an angle, and are, for example, “5 degrees”.

  (Iii) The 1st starting opening 1233 in modification 8 was composition of one. On the other hand, the 1st starting opening 1333 in modification 9 is constituted by the 1st parts Pa and the 2nd parts Pb. The second part Pb is mainly a left side wall portion of the first starting port 1333. The first part Pa is a part other than the second part Pb. At first, as shown in FIG. 22, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are separate bodies, and in the manufacturing stage, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined, and the first starting port 1333 Is configured. The first numerical value information Na is printed on the first part Pa, and the numerical information Nb is printed on the second part Pb. The printing of the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb is performed before the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9 configured as described above, the first nail positioned on the right side on the basis of the first numerical information Na printed on the outer surface 1333 b of the right side wall of the first starting port 1333 The inclination of 42a can be confirmed and corrected. Further, the inclination of the second nail 42b positioned on the left side can be confirmed and corrected based on the second numerical information Nb printed on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting opening 1333. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the ninth modification, since the first start port 1333 is configured of the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the first numerical value information Na is added to the first part Pa at the time of manufacture. The second numerical value information Nb can be easily printed on the second part Pb. In particular, when the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are provided in the same direction so that both the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb can be seen from the right side (the + X direction side). Since the second numerical value information Nb located on the left side (−X direction side) is inside the first starting port 1233, it is difficult to print the second numerical value information Nb at the time of manufacture, but the modification 9 According to the pachinko machine of the present invention, since the first starting opening 1333 is configured to be divided by the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the second numerical information Nb can be printed easily, and the first starting is possible. The mouth 1333 is easy to manufacture.

  Although the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are described, instead of this, information indicating angles may be displayed in the display mode of a plurality of segment light emitting units. The point is that any configuration may be used as long as it indicates information on the angle.

  The first start port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 9 is of a type in which the upper end face is substantially U-shaped, but instead, the wall surface on the rear side (−Z direction side) It can also be of the hollow box-shaped type with. Further, although the first start port 1333 is configured by the first part Pa and the second part Pb, it may be replaced by three or more parts. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb indicating the inclination angles of the nails may be described in the first embodiment and the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth modifications.

A6-10. Modification 10:
FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a motorized accessory 1410 provided in a pachinko machine as a modification 10 and the periphery thereof. The electric role article 1410 is provided, for example, at the lower center of the gaming board of the pachinko machine. As described above, the gaming board is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the electric jack 1410 is provided in the opening 1400 which is one of them.

  The electric symbol 1410 is a normal electric symbol, and is configured as a so-called electric tulip. The electric part 1410 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1411a and 1411b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (opened state). The closed state is a state shown in FIG. In the closed state, since the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is small, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the open state (see FIG. 24 of the modification 11), the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is large, and the game ball can easily enter the ball. The game ball having entered the motorized role 1410 is sent to the opening 1400. For example, a lottery is made on the basis of the entry of the game ball into the electrically operated part 1410. Hereinafter, the movable piece on the + X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b will be referred to as “first movable piece 1411a”, and the movable piece on the −X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b Two movable pieces 1411 b are called. As in the first embodiment, the + X direction indicates the right side in the front view, and the −X direction indicates the left side in the front view.

  A pair of right and left nails 1442 a and 1442 b are provided above the motorized accessory 1410. Depending on the distance between the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b, the probability of the game ball entering the motorized accessory 1410 changes. Hereinafter, the nail on the + X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b is referred to as "first nail 1442a", and the nail on the -X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b is "second nail 1442b" Call it The shapes of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b are the same as the nails of the first embodiment.

  The first nail 1442 is inclined at a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, + X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body with reference to the tip Is provided. The second nail 1442b is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, -X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body with reference to the tip Provided. The inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1442a, and the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1442b are separate ones at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

  In the motorized accessory 1410, the front end portion of the first movable piece 1411a is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as "first flat surface") Sa. The tip portion of the second movable piece 1411 b is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as “second flat surface”) Sb. In the present modification 10, when the motorized accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Sa coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a, and the second flat surface The inclination angle and the inclination direction of Sb are designed in advance so as to coincide with the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1442b. In other words, when the motorized accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa defines the tilt direction and the tilt angle for the first nail 1442a by the tilt direction and the tilt angle, and the second flat surface Sa The surface Sb defines the tilt direction and tilt angle for the second nail 1442b according to the tilt direction and tilt angle.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 10 configured as described above, when the motorized accessory 1410 is in the closed state, relying on the first flat surface Sa of the first movable piece 1411a in the motorized accessory 1410, The inclination of the first nail 1442a can be confirmed and corrected to the shipping condition. In addition, when the motorized accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the tilt of the second nail 1442b is confirmed based on the second flat surface Sb of the second movable piece 1411b in the motorized accessory 1410, and the state at the time of shipment Can be corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination deviation of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b above the motorized symbol 1410 without requiring much experience of nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment device. be able to.

A6-11. Modification 11:
The pachinko machine as the modification 11 is different from the pachinko machine as the modification 10 in the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the flat portion in the motorized part, and further, the first nail and the second nail The position is different. About the structure of those other than these, the pachinko machine as a modification 11 and the pachinko machine as a modification 10 are the same.

  FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1510 provided in a pachinko machine as a modification 11 and the periphery thereof. The electric role thing 1510 is provided, for example, below the center of the game board of the pachinko machine. Similarly to the motorized accessory 1410 in the tenth modification, the motorized accessory 1510 is provided at the opening 1400. The opening 1400 is the same as that of the tenth modification, and therefore, the same reference numeral is given. Similarly to the electric part 1410 in the tenth modification, the electric part 1510 is provided with a pair of right and left movable pieces 1511 a and 1511 b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (opened state). It is done. The open state is a state shown in FIG.

  A first nail 1542a is provided in the upper right direction of the motorized accessory 1510, and a second nail 1542b is provided in the upper left direction of the motorized accessory 1510. The first nail 1542a is inclined at a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, + X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body relative to the tip Is provided. The second nail 1542b is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, -X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body with reference to the tip Provided. The inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1542a, and the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b are separate ones at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

  In the motorized accessory 1510, the tip end portion of the first movable piece 1511a is cut off to form a first flat surface Ha, and the tip end portion of the second movable piece 1511b is cut off to form a second flat surface Hb . In the eleventh modification, when the motorized part 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Ha coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a, and the second flat surface The inclination angle and the inclination direction of Hb are designed in advance so as to coincide with the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b. In other words, when the motorized part 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha defines the tilt direction and the tilt angle for the first nail 1542a by the tilt direction and the tilt angle, and the second flat surface Ha The plane Hb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle with respect to the second nail 1542b by the inclination direction and the inclination angle.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modification 11 configured as described above, when the motorized accessory 1510 is in the open state, relying on the first flat surface Ha of the first movable piece 1511 a of the motorized accessory 1510, The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the motorized part 1510 can be confirmed and corrected. Also, when the motorized part 1510 is in the open state, the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the motorized part 1510, relying on the second flat surface Hb of the second movable piece 1511b of the motorized part 1510. The slope of can be checked and corrected. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the inclination deviation of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b without requiring much experience of nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment device. In particular, the motorized jack 1510 is the target of restoration of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b at the upper right and the upper left of the motorized jack 1510 near the tip position of the movable pieces 1511a and 1511b in the open state. And the nail can be easily repaired.

  In the tenth modification, the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb may be colored in a color different from that of the surroundings. In the eleventh modification, the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb may be colored in a color different from that of the surroundings. According to these configurations, the repairer easily recognizes that the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb and the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb serve as references for repairing the inclination of the nail. Can.

A6-12. Modification 12:
The pachinko machine as the modification 12 is different from the pachinko machine as the modification 11 in the shape of the first movable piece provided in the motorized part and is the same in the remaining points. In the pachinko machine of the modification 12, the same name and code are attached about the same composition as the pachinko machine 10 of the modification 11, and the following explanation is given.

  FIG. 25 is a front view showing a first movable piece 1611 a of a motorized accessory provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 12. Like the modified example 11, the motorized part in the modified example 12 is configured as a so-called powered tulip, and can be switched between the closed state (closed state) and the open state (opened state) as shown by the arrows in the figure. It is configured. The first movable piece 1611a included in the motorized prize corresponds to the first movable piece 1511a in the eleventh modification, and is a movable piece located on the X direction side (right side in front view).

  The first movable piece 1611 a includes a movable piece main body portion 1620 and a protruding piece 1630 which protrudes from a tip end portion of the movable piece main body portion 1620. The end of the projecting piece 1630 opposite to the movable piece main body portion 1620 is a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as “first flat surface”) Ta.

  A pair of nails is provided around the motorized product in the present modification 12 as in the motorized product in the modification 11. One of the pair of nails is a first nail 1542a in the figure. The first nail 1542a is provided on the upper right of the motorized role. When the motorized accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface Ta of the projecting piece 1630 provided on the first movable piece 1611a comes closest to the first nail 1542a. When the motorized part 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Ta coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a.

  Although not shown, the second movable piece of the motorized part in the present modification 12 has a line symmetrical shape with respect to the first movable piece 1611 a with the Y-axis direction as an axis. When the motorized part is in the open state, the second flat surface of the projecting piece provided on the second movable piece comes closest to the second nail 1542b (see FIG. 24 of the modification 11). When the motorized part is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the second flat surface coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 12 configured as described above, as in the modified example 11, when the motorized combination is in the open state, the first flat surface of the first movable piece 1611a of the motorized combination is The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the motorized product can be confirmed and corrected by relying on Ta. Similarly, the second flat surface of the first movable piece can be used to confirm and correct the inclination of the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the motorized part. For this reason, it is possible to easily restore the tilt deviation of the first and second nails 1542a, 1542b at the upper right and upper left of the electric part without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment device. can do.

  Also in the modification 12, the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface may be colored in a color different from that of the surroundings. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface serve as references for repairing the inclination of the nail.

A6-13. Modification 13:
In the first embodiment and the first, fourth, and eighth embodiments, the defining means for defining the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board is the edge portion at the entrance of the first starting opening. On the other hand, as a modification, the defining means may be a part of the outer periphery of the first starting opening, or any part as long as the part has the first starting opening. Moreover, it is not necessary to limit to the site | part which a 1st starting opening has, and it is good also as a part which concerns on a 2nd starting opening and the other ball entrance member. Furthermore, it can also be a portion of members other than the ball entry member.

A6-14. Modification 14:
In the first embodiment and the modifications 1 to 12 described above, nails are adopted to change the distribution of the game balls, but it is not necessary to limit to nails, and it is possible to change the distribution of the game balls. If it is a member, it can also be set as any structure, such as a resin-made protrusion.

A6-15. Modification 15:
In the above modifications 10 to 12, although the electric tulip which is the ordinary electric combination is adopted as the movable means which can be switched between the closed state and the open state, it is replaced by a mini-attacker which is the ordinary electric combination. May be adopted. Specifically, the predetermined part of the mini-attacker defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Furthermore, as a movable means, in place of the ordinary electric combination, a special combination such as an attacker (large winning opening) may be adopted. Specifically, the predetermined part of the attacker defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Furthermore, as a movable means, it is good also as composition which is replaced with an electrically-driven combination thing, and non-electricity combination things, such as mechanical type, are adopted.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by turning on or flashing at the time of the winning lottery, the winning, the reaching, or the like performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25 (rotation operation), the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launch by the game ball launch mechanism by the pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided to detect the amount of rotational operation of the lens by changing the electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The gaming ball is fired from the gaming ball launch mechanism to the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  In addition, on the left side in a front view of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a game ball emission button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball emission button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is emitted to the front of the game board with a predetermined emission intensity regardless of the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same shot intensity as when the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is fired by operating the gaming ball launch button 26, the gaming ball flows to the right of the gaming board in a front view and flows down the right side of the gaming board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can do so-called "right-hand strike". Further, in the following description, the game ball is fired when the operation handle 25 is operated, and when the game ball flows to the left of the game board in a front view and flows down the left of the game board, the player It may be expressed when it strikes. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball emission button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball emission button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 adopts the configuration disposed on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in a front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is disposed at another position It may be adopted. For example, as in the case of the weight button 25b, a configuration may be employed in which the game ball emission button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25. By doing this, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 with only the right hand.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33a, a first starting opening 33b, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, an ordinary electric character 53, a variable winning device 54, and a swing. A minute mechanism 120 is provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning opening 32 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the game winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball.

  The distribution mechanism 120 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 30. The distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the gaming balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 into two flow paths. Of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, one of the flow paths guides the gaming ball to the first starting opening 33a, and the other flow path guides the gaming ball to the first starting opening 33b. Details of the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described later.

  The first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b are ball entrances where game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the first starting opening 33a is disposed at a position where the game balls distributed to the left side by the distribution mechanism 120 from the front view of the game board 30 can enter. Further, the first starting opening 33b is disposed at a position where the game balls distributed to the right by the distribution mechanism 120 from the front view of the game board 30 can enter. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b, one gaming ball is paid out as a winning ball, and a hit lottery to be described later is executed. The number of award balls to be paid out when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port where game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the second start port 34 is disposed between the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as winning balls, and a hit lottery to be described later is executed. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34 is not limited to three, and may be two or less, or four or more.

  The variable winning device 54 includes a large winning opening 54a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 54b for opening and closing the large winning opening 54a. The open / close door 54b is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not enter the large winning opening 54a. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b, or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode is a mode in which the open / close process of the open / close door 54b of the variable winning device 54 is executed. Specifically, when the open / close door 54b of the variable winning device 54 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter changes from the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter into After being switched to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 54a of the variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  The through gate 35 a and the through gate 35 b are through gates which are triggers for executing a lottery for operating the ordinary motor-operated part 53. As shown in FIG. 27, the through gate 35 a is disposed in the distribution mechanism 120. The details of the through gate 35a will be described later. The through gate 35 b is disposed outside the distribution mechanism 120, and is disposed on the right side of the distribution mechanism 120 when the gaming board 30 is viewed from the front. When the gaming ball passes through gate 35a or through gate 35b, main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electronic combination release is won, the normal motorized role piece 53 shifts to the electronic combination open state operating in a predetermined mode. In the present embodiment, the gaming ball having passed through gate 35a and the gaming ball having passed through gate 35b are not reserved.

  The ordinary electric symbol 53 is an electric symbol disposed below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting opening 33b. As described above, the normal motorized symbol 53 operates in a predetermined manner when the winning combination of the motorized symbol opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b is won. The details of the ordinary motorized role piece 53 will be described later.

  Here, the distribution mechanism 120 and the normal motorized symbol 53 will be described.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory view for explaining the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28A, the distribution mechanism 120 includes a case 121 for a distribution mechanism made of resin. In FIG. 28, in order to show the inside of the distribution mechanism housing 121, the outline of the distribution mechanism housing 121 is shown by a broken line. The distribution mechanism casing 121 is formed with an opening 122 through which gaming balls can flow, and an opening 123 and an opening 124 through which gaming balls can flow out. In the distribution mechanism casing 121, a left flow passage R1 and a right flow passage R2 are formed. Furthermore, inside the distribution mechanism casing 121, the distribution rotation portion 125 and the through gate 35a are disposed. The through gate 35a is disposed in the right side flow passage R2.

  The distribution rotation unit 125 includes a rotation shaft 126, and can rotate around the rotation shaft 126. When the distribution rotation portion 125 is rotated clockwise or when it is rotated counterclockwise, the bottom portion of the distribution rotation portion 125 abuts on the distribution mechanism casing 121 The rotation range of the distribution rotation portion 125 is limited. In addition, the distribution rotation unit 125 includes a left holding unit 127 that temporarily holds the gaming ball flowing from the opening 122, and a right holding unit 128.

  An example of the operation of the distribution mechanism 120 is shown using FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (d). As shown in FIG. 28 (a), when the distributing rotation portion 125 is inclined to the left, when the gaming ball flows in from the opening 122, the gaming ball is temporarily held in the right holding portion 128 . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the weight of the gaming ball held by the right holding portion 128 causes the distributing rotation portion 125 to rotate clockwise, and the game held in the right holding portion 128 The sphere is released toward the right channel R2. The gaming ball released from the right side holding unit 128 passes through the through gate 35 a and flows through the right side flow passage R 2 and then flows out from the opening 124. The gaming ball having flowed out of the opening 124 enters the first starting opening 33 b or enters the second starting opening 34 when the ordinary electric jack 53 is in operation. In addition, the rotating part 125 for distribution after rotating clockwise is maintaining the state which inclined to the right side.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28C, when the game ball flows in from the opening 122 next, the distributing rotation portion 125 maintains the inclined state to the right, so the left holding portion 127 temporarily holds Hold the game ball. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the weight of the game ball held by the left side holding portion 127 rotates the distributing rotation portion 125 counterclockwise, and the game held in the left side holding portion 127 Release the sphere towards the left channel R1. The game balls discharged from the left side holding portion 127 flow out of the opening 123 after flowing through the left flow path R1. The game ball having flowed out of the opening 123 enters the first starting opening 33a. In addition, the rotating part 125 for distribution after rotating in the counterclockwise direction maintains the state inclined to the left side. As described above, the sorting mechanism 120 has a function of alternately sorting the gaming balls flowing into the opening 122 into the left channel R1 and the right channel R2.

  Next, the normal motorized role 53 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory view for explaining the ordinary motor-operated part 53. As shown in FIG. FIG. 29 (a) shows the ordinary motorized part 53 in the closed state. As described above, the ordinary motor-operated part 53 is disposed below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting port 33b. As shown in FIG. 29 (b), when the winning combination is opened in the electric combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35a or the penetration gate 35b, the ordinary electric combination 53 is provided. The movable piece 53 a protrudes toward the front side of the game board 30 (hereinafter also referred to as opening).

  As illustrated, the ordinary motor-operated part 53 includes a movable piece 53a and a convex portion 53b disposed on the movable piece 53a. Further, although not shown in FIG. 29 (b), the ordinary motor-operated accessory 53 is provided with a general-purpose electric-object drive unit 53c that drives the movable piece 53a.

  As shown in FIG. 29B, the protruding movable piece 53a assists the gaming ball to enter the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, the patterns in which the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 are roughly two patterns. The first pattern is a pattern for assisting the game ball to flow in from the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 and to allow the game ball distributed to the right channel R2 to enter the second starting opening 34. Specifically, when the movable piece 53a protrudes when the gaming ball distributed to the right channel R2 flows out from the opening 124, the movable piece 53a is the second starting opening for the gaming ball. It guides to 34 and assists in entering the second starting opening 34. The second pattern is a pattern for assisting the game ball flowing down through the through gate 35 b to enter the second starting opening 34. Specifically, when the movable piece 53a protrudes when the gaming ball having passed the through gate 35b flows down and reaches the ordinary motorized role piece 53, the movable piece 53a turns the gaming ball 2 Guide to the starting opening 34 and assist in entering the second starting opening 34. In the case of the second pattern, in the case where the movable piece 53a protrudes when the gaming ball not passing through the through gate 35b reaches the normal motorized role piece 53, the movable piece 53a is the relevant game. Helps the ball enter the second starting opening 34.

  In any of the patterns described above, it is premised that the normal electric character 53 is maintained in the open state until the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting opening 34, The above pattern does not apply to the case where the ordinary electric role piece 53 is closed before the gaming ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting opening 34, in that case The game ball circulated on the movable piece 53a will flow further downstream without entering the second starting opening 34.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the normal motorized prize 53 in the open state is in the closed state. That is, the protruding movable piece 53 a is accommodated in the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of opening patterns of the ordinary electric actor 53, and each type of support mode in which the ordinary electric actor 53 assists the ball entering the second starting opening 34. It is different. In the support mode of the pachinko machine 10, the time from the start of the electric combination opening lottery performed when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b to the time when the lottery result is output (electricity Variation time of the character opening lottery, the winning probability of the electric character opening lottery, and the opening time of the normal electric cylinder 53 are different. Details of the support mode provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described later. The distribution mechanism 120 and the normal motorized symbol 53 have been described above.

  Description is returned to FIG. An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b. The first symbol display portion 37a performs a display corresponding to the lottery result on the segment display when a winning lottery is performed with the game ball entering the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b as a trigger. As a display mode up to the setting, the first symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped based on a lottery that is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34. The second symbol display portion 37b is a display mode until the segment display device causes a display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when the lottery is performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. , The second symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37 b causes the second symbol display unit 37 b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  Here, the time from the start of variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is shown It is called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a to the stop display is referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display section 37b The time from the start of the variation display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is referred to as a second variation time.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first holding display unit 37c and a second holding display unit 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of held first starting ports (the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b) according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b are held as a total of the two first starting openings.

  The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the second starting opening 34 are held.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the game opening symbol is triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the drawing unit 38 lights up as the display mode of the light emitting display, blinks, or a predetermined mode. Make the display of. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. The round game is opened or closed until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls enter the variable winning device 54. It is a game which continues the open state of the door 54b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special view unit 37, the common view unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is equipped is not limited to the liquid crystal display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic electroluminescent display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display portion 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b, the liquid crystal display device 41 The variable display or predetermined display is performed. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the ball entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the variable display or the symbol of the symbol accordingly. Display of. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to performing variable display of symbols or predetermined display triggered by the entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b, or the second starting opening 34, but a big hit It also displays effects during the open / close execution mode that is transitioned to when the player is won. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 30 (a) is an explanatory view showing a first liquid crystal design or a second liquid crystal design that is variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG. 30 (b) is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 30A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), after variation display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the game ball wins in the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b) or the second start opening 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have predetermined periodicity. A variable display that scrolls in the direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, the combination of predetermined symbols determined in advance is on the effective line L when the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a big hit. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Here, the gaming round is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one lottery for one special information every one game cycle. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol per one game cycle. After the segment display is variably displayed on any one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, it is determined in the symbol display device 41 every one game cycle. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), a first hold display area Ds 1 and a second hold display area Ds 2 are displayed on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

  FIG. 30 (b) is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As illustrated, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41 a.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers as liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 30A, and each symbol column has periodicity from the top to the bottom A variable display is provided which scrolls to or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), after variation display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1 for each symbol row.

  Specifically, when the gaming ball enters the special drawing start opening 51, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, and if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. Note that the aspect of the liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA is not limited to the above aspect. For example, various display modes can be adopted for the liquid crystal design, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row is there.

  Here, the game time means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and until the stop display is ended, For the player, the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b) or the second start opening 34 to the player It is one unit of processing to notify. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery every one game cycle. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34, 1 After changing the segment indicator in either one of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b for each game, the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information Stop display of the segment display. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34. After every pattern change, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol row as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, and then displays the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop displaying the symbol row. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on entering the first start hole 33 (the first start hole 33a, the first start hole 33b) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on entering the second start port 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are unexecuted game times, and are special obtained based on entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34. About information, it refers to the game times in which the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery is not started. The number of the hold game times that can be held based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, in the first hold display area Ds1, hold displays (hereinafter also referred to as first hold game times display) corresponding to four hold game times can be displayed. In addition, the number of the hold game times that can be held based on the entry of the ball into the second starting opening 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a hold display (hereinafter also referred to as a second hold game times display) corresponding to the four hold game times can be displayed in the second hold display area Ds2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), on the display surface 41a, flickering display and lighting synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special drawing unit 37 The second synchronization display performing flickering display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the first synchronization display unit Sync1 for displaying and the second symbol display unit 37b of the special drawing unit 37 And a unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display unit 37a performs stop display, the first synchronization display unit 371 performs the first display. (1) The synchronization display section Sync 1 lights up. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display unit 37b performs stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The unit Sync 2 lights up.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display unit Sync1, and the second synchronization display unit Sync2. Although the configuration is adopted, a configuration in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays may be adopted.

B2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of the stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33 (a first starting opening 33a, a first starting opening 33b), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, Various detection sensors provided on various entrance holes and through gates such as the variable winning device 54 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each entrance, and the gaming ball passes through the through gate. It is judged whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 (first start opening 33a, first start opening 33b) and the second start opening 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a common electric symbol drive unit 53c for opening and closing the ordinary electric symbol 53, a variable winning drive unit 54c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54, and a main display unit 45 and are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 54 c such that the open / close door 54 b is opened or closed. Further, when the winning combination is won as a result of the electric combination opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the general electric combination driving unit 53 c so that the normal combination of electric combination 53 is opened. Furthermore, in each game session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45 The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, on the transmission side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first start hole 33 When the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the second start When the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls.

  A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the emission control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on and the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, to the launch control device 80, a game ball launch button 26 is connected. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence or absence of reach, the contents of reach effect, and the contents of effects to be executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. In the present embodiment, the stop time which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, a unit game play time, which is the time required for one game play, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for the winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a winning lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 45, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is to be generated when changing out a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C4 is used in the electric combination opening lottery for determining whether the ordinary electric combination 53 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. In the pending information storage area 64b, a first pending area Ra and a second pending area Rb are provided. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b), the big hit random number counter C1 at the entering time, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 The respective values of the fluctuation type counter CS are stored in time series in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS at the time of the entered ball is the 1st in pending information storage area 64b. [2] are stored in chronological order in reserve area Rb.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is the timing of the ball entering when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 (the first starting hole 33a, the first starting hole 33b) Is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b is stored at the timing of the ball entering. It is memorized.

  The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the success or failure table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not a jackpot will be made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb is the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b Or) move to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game balls entering the second starting opening 34. Then, the big hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is checked with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / not table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 39 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is updated when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) at the timing of the entry. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. Ru.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, and the judgment processing execution area 64c when the result of the lottery is the jackpot. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Furthermore, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is updated at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b). It is stored in the first holding area Ra, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 Is determined whether or not to occur. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 Is determined whether or not to occur. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit may be established for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 30 (b), the symbols are first stopped in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 to become a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the fluctuation time of the symbols of the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, the details of the motor-operated product release counter C4 will be described. For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized combination release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the motorized combination release counter C4 moves to the motorized combination execution area 64e at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. Thereafter, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the ordinary electric symbol 53 in the open state using the value of the electric symbol opening counter C4 in the electric symbol execution area 64e. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the normal motorized symbol 53 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 46, the normal motorized symbol 53 is maintained in the closed state.

  In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the big hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the motorized combination release counter C4 and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. It corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra and the second reserve area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation class counter CS is reserved Also called information.

  Next, the success or failure table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the winning lottery, and in the low probability mode, the hit / fall table for the low probability mode is referred to and the high probability table is selected. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is the first holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b). Table for matching with the big hit random number counter C1 stored in Ra, and for matching with the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 The pass / fail table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a hit table for the first start opening (for low probability mode), a hit or failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode), a hit table for the second start opening (low) Four pass / fail tables for the probability mode) and the pass / fail table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode) are stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of the acceptance table for the first starting opening. FIG. 33 (a) shows a yes / no table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening, and FIG. 33 (b) shows a yes / no table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting opening. There is. And the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of the values of 0 to 1199. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the hit table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the big hit. It is done. And among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out. As described above, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is higher than in the low probability mode.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of a hit / fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 34 (a) shows a pass / fail table (for low probability mode) for the second start port, and FIG. 34 (b) shows a pass / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second start port.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting opening There is. And the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of the values of 0 to 1199. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the big hit in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). It is done. And among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out. As described above, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is higher than in the low probability mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the big hit random number counter C1 set as the big hit in the low probability mode hit / not table is the value of the big hit random number counter C1 set as the big hit in the high probability mode hit / not table. It is included in the group. However, if the probability of the high probability mode becoming a big win is higher than the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big hit are arbitrary.

  In addition, although not employ | adopted in the success or failure table in this embodiment, you may provide "small hit" as a result of a lottery.

  The "small hit" is a transition result to the opening / closing execution mode in which opening / closing of the variable winning device 54 is executed, but is a result of success or failure not to be the transition opportunity in both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "disengagement" is not a transition opportunity of the open / close execution mode, and is a result of success or failure not becoming a transition opportunity also in the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by making a difference in the following four modes or modes.
(1) The number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door of the variable winning prize device in the opening and closing execution mode (the number of rounds)
(2) Aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)
(4) Mode of support mode after the open / close execution mode ends

  As an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a plurality of opening and closing patterns (hereinafter simply referred to as "opening and closing patterns") of the opening and closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 are provided. One type of opening / closing pattern may be set correspondingly. In the present embodiment, one type of open / close pattern is set corresponding to each type of jackpot, and the open / close mode of the open / close door 54b is different for each open / close pattern. The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 54b in the present embodiment will be described later.

  In addition, as a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence (winning) of game balls entering the variable winning device 54 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relative. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set to be high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 54b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 54b becomes seven. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 54b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds elapse or until the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 54b becomes seven. Can.

  The open limit time for one open of the open / close door 54b and the open limit number for one open are the frequency of occurrence of entering the variable winning device between the start of the open / close execution mode and the end thereof. If the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the open mode of the open / close door 54b is optional. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 54 may occur. In the present embodiment, the low frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high frequency winning mode is set in all the jackpots.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery results in a big hit, the big hit type counter C2 is used to distribute the big hit type. The distribution of jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 35 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 35 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to in the case of a lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b), and the second starting opening The sorting table for use is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 35 (a), the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) in the distribution table for the first start port. 16R probability variation big hit B, 8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal jackpot A is set as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball to the. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 4" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot B, and "5 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot A, " 20 to 39 "are set to correspond to 8R normal jackpot A.

  The number of opening times of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds) in the 16R probability variation big hit B, and the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the jackpot is won next time. . The details of the support mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

  In the 8R probability variation big hit A, the open number of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In 8R probability variation jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode A continues until the jackpot is won next time. .

  In 8R normal jackpot A, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, 8R normal big hit A, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode A is started The high frequency support mode A is executed until the game is completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode A to the low frequency support mode.

  As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 35 (b), the distribution table for the second starting opening is a jackpot type based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34, 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 8R regular jackpot B is set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot B, and "10 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot B, " 20 to 39 "are set to correspond to 8R normal jackpot B.

  The 16R probability variation jackpot B has been described in the distribution table for the first starting opening in FIG. 35, so the description here is omitted.

  In the 8R probability variation big hit B, the open number of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In 8R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the jackpot is won next time. .

  In 8R normal jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, 8R normal big hit B, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B is started The high frequency support mode B is executed until the game is completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode B to the low frequency support mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is achieved is the game ball to the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b) There is a difference between the case of a big hit based on entering the ball and the case of a big hit based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, and a clear difference in the advantage for the player It is provided.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type The MPU 62 further determines the stop display on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2 Determine the display mode. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the electronic combination open lottery and the support mode will be described.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing the contents of a to-do table (to-do table for electric combination open lottery) used when executing the to-be-operated combination open lottery.

  FIG. 36 (a) shows a table (for low frequency support mode) of an electric combination product release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the electric character combination open lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 as values of the electric character combination open counter C4 for which the electric combination opening is elected A value has been set. As the values of the motorized product release counter C4 to be disengaged, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, when the game ball passes through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and the electric combination opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the winning combination is won with a probability of 1/233. . When the electronic combination open lottery is won, the opening and closing operation of the normal electric power steering wheel 53 is executed. The aspect of the opening / closing operation of the normal motorized symbol 53 at the time of execution of the low frequency support mode will be described later.

  FIG. 36 (b) shows a table (for high frequency support mode) for the motor-operated combination release lottery used in the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B). As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the electric combination release table for high or low support mode (for high frequency support mode), 462 462 of 0 to 461 as the value of the combination opening electric counter C4 that becomes electric combination opening winning A value has been set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the motorized product release counter C4 to be disengaged. That is, when the game ball passes through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and the electric combination opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the winning combination is won with a probability of 231/233. . When the electronic combination open lottery is won, the opening and closing operation of the normal electric power steering wheel 53 is executed. An aspect of the opening / closing operation of the ordinary motor-operated part 53 during execution of the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B will be described later.

  As described above, the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B) is easier to win the electronic part opening lottery than the low frequency support mode by the motorized product open lottery pass / fail table. It is set to become.

  Next, details of the support mode that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 can execute three types of support modes: a low frequency support mode, a high frequency support mode A, and a high frequency support mode B.

Low frequency support mode
As shown in FIG. 37, in the low-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery is 1/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal symbol) in the electronic combination open lottery is 10 seconds. That is, when the electronic combination open lottery is started, the normal symbol starts to change, and it takes 10 seconds for the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result. In addition, when winning the electronic combination opening lottery, from the time when the fluctuation time ends, the time it takes the movable piece 53a to start projecting and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0.1 second. The opening time of the ordinary electric jackpot 53 (the time during which the movable piece 53a is kept protruding from the game board 30) when the winning combination opening lottery is won is 3 seconds. However, when one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary electric symbol 53 is opened, the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed.

  In the low-frequency support mode, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left and strike the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in which gaming balls are circulated when the low frequency support mode is executed. In FIG. 38, the normal motorized combination 53 indicates the closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates the open state when represented by a solid line.

  When the player causes the game ball to flow so that the player strikes left and enters the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the game ball entered in the opening 122 is flowed to the left by the distribution turning unit 125. It is alternately distributed to the path R1 and the right side flow path R2. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the gaming balls distributed to the left channel R1 flow out from the opening 123 and enter the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out of the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electronic combination open lottery executed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35a is low (wining probability: 1/233), and the ordinary electric character 53 is open The probability of becoming is low. Therefore, at the time when the gaming ball flows out from the opening 124, the probability that the ordinary motor-operated accessory 53 is closed is high, and the gaming ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting opening 33b. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the gaming ball entering the sorting mechanism 120 enters the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b in most cases, and the first starting opening 33 (first A game run triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b) is executed. Further, in the low frequency support mode, even when winning is performed in the electronic combination open lottery executed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35a, the fluctuation time of the electronic combination open lottery is 10 seconds. And, since it takes about 0.3 seconds for the game ball to pass the through gate 35b to reach the ordinary motorized character 53, the game ball which has passed the through gate 35a that has triggered the winning is However, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second starting opening 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric jack 53 that has been opened by the winning. In addition, the game ball which reached the said ordinary electric power thing 53 at the timing which is the open state of the ordinary electric power thing 53 may enter the 2nd starting opening 34 by assistance of the ordinary electric power thing 53.

  In the low frequency support mode, if the game ball is passed so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35b by hitting the right, the game ball is executed triggered by the passage of the through gate 35b. The probability of winning in the electronic combination opening lottery is low (wining probability: 1/233), and the probability that the ordinary electric power steering wheel 53 is in the open state is low. Therefore, the possibility that the gaming ball having passed through gate 35b enters the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b, and the second starting opening 34 is low, and the gaming ball having passed through gate 35b flows down as it is Enter the outlet 43. Temporarily, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is made to pass so that the game ball is made to pass to the through gate 35b by making a right strike and the game ball is passed by the through gate 35b as an electronic lottery open lottery Even in the case of winning in the low frequency support mode, the opening time of the normal motorized symbol 53 is 3 seconds, and the gaming ball that has passed the through gate 35b and reached the common motorized symbol 53 is the second Since the time required to reach the starting opening 34 is about 5.0 seconds, the normal motorized role piece 53 is before the gaming balls circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a reach the second starting opening 34. There is no possibility that the game ball, which is closed and becomes a trigger for winning the electric combination open lottery, enters the second starting opening 34.

[High frequency support mode A]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode A, the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electronic combination open lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, when the electronic combination open lottery is started, the normal symbol starts to change, and it takes 0.05 seconds for the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in order to notify the lottery result. In addition, as described above, when the variable opening time is ended, the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the time it takes the gaming ball to be able to flow on the upper surface is 0. 0. It is one second. The opening time of the ordinary electric actor 53 in the case of winning the electronic combination opening lottery is 3 seconds. However, when one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary electric symbol 53 is opened, the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed.

  In the high-frequency support mode A, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in which gaming balls are distributed when the high frequency support mode A is executed. It should be noted that, in FIG. 39, when the motor-operated combination 53 is represented by a broken line, it indicates a closed state, and when represented by a solid line, it indicates an open state.

  When the player distributes the game ball so that the player strikes the left and enters the distribution mechanism 120 (the opening 122), the game ball entered in the opening 122 is left-handed by the distribution rotation part 125. It distributes alternately to channel R1 and right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the gaming balls distributed to the left flow passage R1 flow out from the opening 123 and enter the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out of the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning in the electronic combination open lottery executed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35a is high (wining probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric character 53 is open. The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35a and the winning combination lottery is won, the normal motorized prize 53 is in the open state when the gaming ball flows out from the opening 124 In order to set the high frequency support mode A, the variation time of the open lottery for lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, when winning the electronic combination opening lottery, from the time when the fluctuation time ends, the time it takes the movable piece 53a to start projecting and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0.1 second. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from the game ball passing through the through gate 35a to the arrival at the ordinary motorized role piece 53 is 0.3 seconds. In other words, the electronic combination that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a during the time (0.3 seconds) from the game ball passing through the through gate 35a to reaching the ordinary motorized prize 53 (0.3 seconds) Until the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface from the time when the fluctuation time (0.05 second) of the opening lottery and the fluctuation time end when winning in the electronic combination opening lottery is finished When the winning combination is won because the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, when the gaming ball flows out from the opening 124, the ordinary electric character 53 is The game ball having flowed out of the opening 124 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the ordinary motor-operated accessory 53.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ordinary electric role in the high-frequency support mode A is provided in order to allow the gaming ball having flowed out of the opening 124 to flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting opening 34. The opening time of the object 53 is set to 3.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time until the gaming ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 and reaches the movable piece 53a flows on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting opening 34 is It is 2.0 seconds. Therefore, the gaming ball having flowed out of the opening 124 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a and enters the second starting opening 34. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, when the gaming ball is distributed to the right channel R2 as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the gaming ball is secondly started with the assistance of the ordinary electric role 53. The probability of entering the mouth 34 is high. In the high-frequency support mode A, although the open time of the normal electric actor 53 is 3 seconds, it is distributed to the right flow path R2 in order to close when one gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34. If the gaming ball reaches the ordinary electric jack 53 immediately after the ordinary electric jack 53 is closed, the gaming ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 enters the first starting opening 33b. In addition, when one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 and another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball is normally closed by the electric vehicle 53. The ball does not enter the second start port 34 and flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode A, all the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 may not enter the second starting opening 34. In the case of the high frequency support mode A, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment passes the through gate 35b when the player distributes the game ball so that the player strikes the right and passes the through gate 35b. The game ball that has reached the normal motorized role piece 53 is configured not to enter the second starting opening 34. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball which has passed through gate 35 b and reached ordinary electric role object 53 circulates on the upper surface of movable piece 53 a and reaches second starting opening 34. The average value of the time until it is 5.0 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the opening time of the normal motor-operated symbol 53 in the high-frequency support mode A is set to 3.0 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball passing through the through gate 35b reaches the open ordinary electric combination 53, the ordinary electric combination 53 is closed in the middle of the upper surface of the movable piece 53a. Before the ball reaches the second start port 34, the ball is released from the motor-operated component 53 and flows downward further, so the ball does not enter the second start port 34. Therefore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the distribution mode of the gaming ball to be caused to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 becomes the distribution mode of the gaming ball in which the player's profit is maximized.

[High frequency support mode B]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode B, the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electronic combination open lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, when the electronic combination open lottery is started, the normal symbol starts to change, and it takes 0.05 seconds for the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in order to notify the lottery result. In addition, as described above, when the variable opening time is ended, the movable piece 53a starts to project, and the time it takes for the game ball to flow on the upper surface is 0. 0. It is one second. The opening time of the ordinary electric actor 53 in the case of winning the electronic combination opening lottery is 6 seconds. However, when one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary electric symbol 53 is opened, the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed.

  In the high-frequency support mode B, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the right and pass the through gate 35b.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in which gaming balls are distributed when the high frequency support mode B is executed. In FIG. 40, the normal motorized combination 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

  When the player distributes the gaming ball so that the player strikes the right and passes the through gate 35b, the electronic combination open lottery is executed when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35b. In the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning in the electronic combination open lottery executed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35b is high (wining probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric character 53 is open The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through gate 35 b and the winning combination lottery lottery is won, the normal electric motor 53 is reached when the gaming ball passing through through gate 35 b reaches the normal electric role 53 In order to cause the accessory 53 to be in the open state, the fluctuation time of the electronic combination open lottery in the high frequency support mode B is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, when winning the electronic combination opening lottery, from the time when the fluctuation time ends, the time it takes the movable piece 53a to start projecting and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0.1 second. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from the game ball passing through the through gate 35b to the arrival at the normal motorized role piece 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, the electronic combination is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b from the time (0.3 seconds) from the game ball passing through the through gate 35b to the arrival at the ordinary motorized prize 53 (0.3 seconds) Until the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface from the time when the fluctuation time (0.05 second) of the opening lottery and the fluctuation time end when winning in the electronic combination opening lottery is finished The game ball passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric role piece 53 when the winning combination is won because the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter. At this point, the ordinary electric symbol 53 is open, and the gaming ball that has reached the ordinary electric symbol 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the ordinary electric symbol 53.

  Also, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the gaming ball that has passed through gate 35 b to reach ordinary motorized goods 53 to flow on the upper surface of movable piece 53 a and to reach second start port 34, The open time of the ordinary motorized boat 53 in the high frequency support mode B is set to 6.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time taken for the gaming ball that has passed through the through gate 35b to reach the ordinary motorized part 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting opening 34 The average value is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, the gaming ball having flowed out of the opening 124 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a and enters the second starting opening 34. In the high-frequency support mode B, although the open time of the normal electric actor 53 is 6.0 seconds, it passes through the through gate 35b in order to close when one game ball enters the second starting opening 34. When the game ball reaches the normal electric battery 53 immediately after the normal electric character 53 is closed, the game ball flows down as it is. That is, the gaming ball does not enter the second starting opening 34. In addition, when one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 and another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball is normally closed by the electric vehicle 53. The ball does not enter the second start port 34 and flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode B, all the gaming balls having passed through the through gate 35 b may not enter the second starting opening 34.

  As described above, in the high frequency support B, when the player strikes the right, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 with high probability. As shown by the distribution table for the first start opening and the distribution table for the second start opening in FIG. 35, the player wins a big hit in the lottery, triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first start opening 33. The expectation value of the privilege to be awarded when the jackpot is won in the lottery, which is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34, is higher than the expectation value of the privilege to be awarded. If, in the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball is circulated to enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120 by temporarily striking the left, the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 Because the game ball enters the ball alternately, the expectation of the privilege to be awarded when winning a big hit than in the case where the game ball is entered only in the second starting opening 34 with a high probability by hitting right The value is lower. Therefore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode of the gaming ball passing the through gate 35b by hitting the right becomes the distribution mode of the gaming ball in which the player's profit is maximized.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33a when the gaming ball is distributed so as to maximize the player's profit. 33b) A state in which the game ball enters the ball only in the low frequency support mode, a state in which the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 alternately (the state in the high frequency support mode A) Three states can be created in a state where the gaming ball enters only the second starting opening 34 (high frequency support mode B state).

B3. Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in step F101, when the player starts playing the game, the lottery mode in the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. At this time, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect to urge the player to hit the ball leftward and cause the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122) to enter the game ball.

  As described above, in the low frequency support mode, the gaming balls entering the sorting mechanism 120 enter the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b in most cases, and the first starting A game run triggered by the entry of the game ball into the opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) is executed. The state of step F101 is executed until a jackpot is won in the game run triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) (F102: NO ).

  If, in the state of step F101, the jackpot is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) (F102: YES), A round game according to the type is executed (F103). For example, if the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot B, the variable winning device 54 executes the opening and closing operation and round game for 16 rounds is executed, and in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot A and 8R normal jackpot A, The variable winning device 54 executes the opening and closing operation, and eight rounds of round games are executed.

  After the end of the round game, the state of the game changes to a different state for each jackpot type of the jackpot won earlier. If the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. That is, in the case of the jackpot type of shifting to the state of the high frequency support mode B after the end of the round game, the process proceeds to step F111.

  In step F104, when the jackpot type is not jackpot B (F104: NO), the process proceeds to step F105. That is, in the case of the jackpot type transition to the state of high frequency support mode A after the end of the round game, specifically, the game to the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) If the 8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot A is won in the game run executed with the entry of a ball, the process proceeds to step F105.

  In step F105, if the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a normal jackpot (for example, 8R normal jackpot A) (F105: NO) ), Go to step F106.

  In step F106, after the end of the round game (F103), the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to hit the game ball in the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122) by striking left.

  As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the gaming balls entered in the distribution mechanism 120 alternate between the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a) and the second starting opening 34. Hit the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, in the order in which the game balls enter the respective starting openings, a game cycle triggered by entering the game balls is executed. Therefore, in a state where the gaming ball alternately enters the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a) and the second starting opening 34, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 as a trigger. A game cycle to be performed and a game cycle triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 are alternately executed.

  In the high-frequency support mode A in the state of step F106, the game cycle triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34 Continue until the game is executed 100 times (F107: N0 → F108: NO), and if the jackpot is not won by 100 game times (F107: NO → F108: YES), go to step F101. Return to the state shown. That is, the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is restored.

  On the other hand, in the state of step F106, the game cycle triggered by the game ball entering the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b) or the second start opening 34 is executed 100 times. If the jackpot is won by (F107: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

  In step F105, if the jackpot type is a definite variation jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109.

  In step F109, after the end of the round game (F103), the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to hit the game ball in the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122) by striking left.

  The state of step F109 is the high frequency support mode A. As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the gaming balls entered in the distribution mechanism 120 alternate between the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a) and the second starting opening 34. Hit the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, in the order in which the game balls enter the respective starting openings, a game cycle triggered by entering the game balls is executed. Therefore, in a state where the gaming ball alternately enters the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a) and the second starting opening 34, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 as a trigger. A game cycle to be performed and a game cycle triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 are alternately executed.

  Since the state of step F109 is the high probability mode, the state of the high frequency support mode A continues until a jackpot is won in the executed game round (F110: NO).

  In the state of step F109, when the jackpot is won in the game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b) or the second start opening 34 The (F110: YES), proceeds to step F103, a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

  In step F104, if the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. Specifically, when the player wins the 16R probability variation big hit B in the game run executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b), or 2) If the game is executed with the game ball having entered the starting opening 34 as a trigger, the game proceeds to step F111 when the player wins 16R probability variation big hit B, 8R probability variation big hit B, 8R regular big hit B.

  In step F111, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B (F111: YES), the process proceeds to step F112.

  In step F112, after the end of the round game (F103), the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to hit the game ball in the distribution mechanism 120 (opening portion 122) to make a right strike.

  In the state of the high frequency support mode B, the gaming ball having passed through the through gate 35 b enters the second starting opening 34 with assistance by the normal electric symbol 53. Therefore, the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is executed.

  Since the step F112 is a high probability mode, the state of the high frequency support mode B continues until a jackpot is won in the executed game round (F113: NO).

  If, in the state of step F112, the jackpot is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 (F113: YES), the process proceeds to step F103 and the round according to the type of jackpot A game is executed.

  If it is determined in step F111 that the jackpot type is not the definite variation jackpot B (F111: NO), the process proceeds to step F114.

  In step F114, after the end of the round game (F103), the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to hit the game ball in the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122) by striking left.

  As described above, in the state of the high-frequency support mode B, the gaming ball having passed through the through gate 35 b enters the second starting opening 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric jack 53. Therefore, the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is executed.

  The high-frequency support mode B in the state of step F114 continues until the game cycle triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is executed 100 times (F115: N0 → F116: NO), If the jackpot has not been won by 100 times of the execution (F115: NO → F116: YES), the process returns to the state shown in step F101. That is, the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is restored.

  On the other hand, if, in the state of step F114, the jackpot is won by 100 game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 (F115: YES), the process proceeds to step F103. Advance, a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

  The flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above. As described in the flow of the game, when the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment distributes the gaming balls so as to maximize the player's profit, the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33a, 1) The game ball enters the ball only in the start opening 33b) (low frequency support mode state); the game ball enters the first start hole 33 and the second start hole 34 alternately (high frequency support mode) The game proceeds while transitioning between the three states (a state of A) and a state (a state of high frequency support mode B) in which the gaming ball enters the ball only at the second starting opening 34.

  Here, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects exerted by the features will be described in comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. First, in the case of winning a winning lottery (including a big hit and a small hit if a small hit is set) in the winning lottery that was executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first starting port The expected value of the benefit (for example, the number of winning balls to be paid out) is given as the first benefit expected value, and it is hit in the winning lottery executed with the game ball entering the second starting opening as a win (big hit, And, when the small hitting is set, the expected value of the benefit (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given when the small hitting is included is taken as the second benefit expected value. In addition, the expectation value of the benefit granted when winning in the normal time is the normal benefit expectation value, and the expected value of the benefit granted in the high frequency support mode when the winning is achieved is the high expectation value bonus expected value I assume.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, pachinko machines (hereinafter, also referred to as “conventional pachinko machines”) provided with a sorting mechanism that distributes game balls to a first starting opening and a second starting opening exist. Conventionally, in a normal state (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode) at the beginning of playing a game, a pachinko machine distributes game balls to reach the distribution mechanism, and the first starting opening and the second starting opening Insert the game ball into the mouth alternately. And when it shifts to the high frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (the ordinary motorized role thing) operates with high frequency, entering the game ball in the 2nd starting opening with high probability without passing through the distribution means Let

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when trying to increase the high-sappoon bonus expectation value higher than the normal-time bonus expecting value and to increase the difference thereof, it is inevitably necessary to increase the second high-sappoon bonus expectation value. It is necessary to increase the benefit expectation value, but when the second benefit expectation value is increased, the benefit expectation value for normal times also increases (in the normal state, the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening and the second starting opening) Because the ball is hit and a lottery is executed). In addition, even if the first benefit expectation value is reduced, since the normal benefit expectation value is the average of the first benefit expectation value and the second benefit expectation value, the effect of reducing the first benefit expectation value is It becomes smaller.

  Furthermore, when regulation is provided to the size of the privilege which can be granted per unit time, if the bonus expectation value for the normal time is relatively large, in order to adjust within the range of the regulation, the bonus expectation value for high support is adjusted. Needs to be smaller. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the normal benefit expectation value and the high-sapple benefit benefit value. In other words, among the gaming states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profit obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. As a result, the player's sense of expectation in the case of transitioning from the normal state (the normal gaming state, the state with the smallest expected bonus value) to the high frequency support mode (the best gaming state, the largest state with the expected bonus value) It can not be caused.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment distributes the gaming ball to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in the normal state, but since the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33a only with high probability, By setting the first benefit expectation value low, the normal benefit expectation value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball enters only the second starting opening 34 with high probability when the player performs a right strike, so the second benefit expectation value should be set high. By this, it is possible to increase the high-sappo-time benefit expectation value in the frequent support B. That is, among the gaming states excluding the open / close execution mode, a large swing can be provided to the profit obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the gaming balls are distributed to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the gaming balls are alternately entered into the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 34, Expected value during high support period (high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between normal result expectation value and high support period benefit expectation value (high frequency support mode B), and normal status → high frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game such as mode A → high frequency support mode B, while the value of the privilege expectation value to be granted is gradually increased, and in the gaming state excluding the open / close execution mode, the normal Between the gaming state and the best gaming state, a large swing can be provided to the profit obtained by the player.

  Furthermore, in the case where there is a restriction on the size of the benefit that can be granted per unit time, the size of the benefit that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be set by setting the first benefit expectation value low. Adjustment is possible, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first benefit expectation value and the second benefit expectation value is increased. That is, among the gaming states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is possible to give per unit time while securing a large swing in the difference in profit obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of the special benefits within the limits of regulation.

  In addition, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects exerted by the features are compared with those of a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) having a sorting mechanism that distributes game balls to the first starting opening and the second starting opening. Although explained, the effect is not effective only for the conventional pachinko machine exemplified above, but for a pachinko machine provided with two or more ball entry parts that trigger different types of lottery to be executed. The effect is achieved.

B4. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of the specific process performed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. The process executed in main controller 60 will be described first, and then the process executed in audio light emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball-entering detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S20102.

  In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S20103.

  In step S20103, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized combination release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4, and when their respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S20104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 48) described later.

  In step S20104, the ball entry processing for the starting port accompanying the ball entering the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) and the second starting port 34 is executed. Details of the ball entrance process for the starting opening in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process advances to step S20105.

  In step S20105, the ball entry processing for through accompanying the ball entry to the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. Details of the through ball-in process at step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Ball-in process for start opening>
Next, the ball entering process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entering processing for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: S20104) of timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step S20201, detection of a detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33 as to whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) (start winning combination) Determined by the state. If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20203.

  In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b) to the management control device on the game hall side. I do. Then, it progresses to step S20204.

  In step S20204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as first start pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of holdings based on entering the ball into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  If it is determined in step S20201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205 and the gaming ball It is determined from the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start opening 34 whether or not the ball enters the second start opening 34.

  If it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206 and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20205 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

  In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 as a signal. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20208.

  In step S20208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as second start pending number RbN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the second pending area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the second starting opening 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start reservation pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step S20209, when the start reservation number N is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S20209, if the start pending count N is less than the upper limit (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, 1 is added to the start pending count N for the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S20211. And 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserve number storage area (hereinafter, referred to as the total reserve number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20212.

  In step S20212, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42), and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 48) are Among the free storage areas of the corresponding holding area, the first storage area is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings to which 1 is added in step S20210. Specifically, when the first start reservation number RaN is set as the process target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the big hit random number counter updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) The respective values of the fluctuation type counter CS are stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. In addition, when the second start reservation number RbN is set as a processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reserve area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start reserve number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

  In step S20213, an earlier determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS, the winning judgment result (lottery result) of the winning lottery, the big hit It is the processing of executing the determination of the type, the presence or absence of reach, the fluctuation time of the game times, etc., before the hold information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the prior determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

  In step S20214, a process of setting a hold command is performed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS Set) as a hold command.

  The hold command is based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34, and the hold information obtained on the basis of the ball input. It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the determination result (the first determination information) by the first determination process before the hold information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process described later (FIG. 48: step S20703).

  In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first start opening 33 (the first start opening 33a, the first start opening 33b), the symbol display device 41 A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry to the second start opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of displays in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 A command for changing in response to the increase is sent to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry processing for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 43: S20213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the destination determination process, based on the hold information, the hold information is mainly used to determine whether the winning lottery is successful, the type of the big hit, the presence or absence of the reach, the change of the game time, etc. This processing is executed before the target of the hit lottery by the control device 60.

  In step S20301, a jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. The said process is a process which performs the determination of the success or failure of the winning lottery, the determination of the type of the big hit, and the presence or absence of the reach. Details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing step S20301, the process proceeds to step S20302.

  In step S20302, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. The said process is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation time of game time. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

  After executing step S20302, the present destination determination process ends.

<Big hit · reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 44: S20301) of the first determination processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing. In step S 20401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C 1 stored in the storage area is read out by entering the starting opening in the starting opening entrance ball processing (FIG. 43). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20402 to determine a lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed by entering the ball before the current entering ball is read out from the corresponding storage area, and there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs prior to the winning lottery due to the current entering ball It determines the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry of the ball is executed as the game time.

  In step S20402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as the game turn (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403 and the table of acceptances is stored. Referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the probability table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S20402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as the game turn (S20402: NO), the process proceeds to step S20404 and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success / failure table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S20405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20405: YES), the process proceeds to step S20406 and is stored in the storage area by entering the current starting opening. The value of the determined jackpot type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 that has become the current distribution target is acquired based on entering the ball into the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) , Refers to the first starting opening distribution table, and in the case where it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, refers to the second starting opening distribution table. After executing step S20407, the process proceeds to step S20408.

  In step S20408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step S20408, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probable variation jackpot (S20408: YES), the process proceeds to step S20409, and the probable variation jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20408 that it does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot (S20408: NO), the process proceeds to step S20410, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S20405 that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the big hit (S20405: NO), the process proceeds to step S20411 and enters the storage area by entering the current start opening. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the reach occurrence.

  If it is determined in step S20413 that reach has been generated (S20413: YES), the process proceeds to step S20414 to store reach generation information in the first determination process result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20413 that the reach has not been generated (S20413: NO), the first determination process is ended.

<Variation time information acquisition process>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 44: S20302).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S20501, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the storage area is acquired by entering the starting opening in the starting opening entrance ball processing (FIG. 43). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20502.

  In step S20502, it is determined whether or not a winning lottery pertaining to the current game run has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot determined by the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing, and if it is a jackpot (S20502: YES), the process proceeds to step S20503.

  In step S <b> 20503, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63 d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. After executing step S20503, the process proceeds to step S20507.

  In step S20507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the destination determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S20502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot (step S20502: NO), the process proceeds to step S20504, and it is determined whether or not reach is generated. If it is determined in step S20504 that a reach occurs (S20504: YES), the process proceeds to step S20505.

  In step S20505, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20507, and the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is ended.

  In step S20504, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game round (step S20504: NO), the process proceeds to step S20506, and the reach non-occurrence change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d is With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20507, and the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is ended.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start reservation number RaN and the second start reservation number RbN increase. There is. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start reservation number RaN and the second start reservation number RbN when determining the fluctuation time of the game time Is different.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start reservation number RaN and the second start reservation number RbN increase. In the other configuration, for example, the variation time may be set to be shorter as the value of the total pending number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. The variation time may increase as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-occurrence so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode A variation time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the regular jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the outreach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete outlier may be individually set.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the ball insertion process for through will be described. The ball entry processing for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 42: step S20105).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the through ball entry process. In step S20601, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered (passed) through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). If it is determined in step S20601 that the gaming ball has entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: YES), the process proceeds to step S20602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that the gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: NO), the through processing for this through is ended.

  In step S20602, it is determined whether the electronic processing for a process in progress flag is ON. The electronic part processing in progress flag is turned ON when the electronic part open lottery is triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), and the electronic part open lottery is When the lottery result is out, the setting of the outlier display is turned OFF, and when the lottery result of the electronic combination open lottery is a hit, the setting of the hit display and the release of the ordinary electric jack 53 executed along with the hit It is turned off after the end of processing. Hereinafter, the electronic combination open lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), the display of the lottery result (hit or miss) executed along with the lottery, The opening process of the ordinary motor-operated part 53 executed in the case of a hit is also referred to as an electronic combination process. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 (the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b) does not hold the passage of the game ball. That is, in the period during which the processing for electronic combination is executed triggered by the game ball passing through through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is newly added. Even when the game ball enters the game ball, the processing for electronic combination triggered by the game ball is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S20602 that the electronic processing for a process is not on (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to step S20603 to turn on the electronic processing for a flag. After executing step S20603, the process proceeds to step S20604. On the other hand, in step S20602, when it is determined that the electronic processing processing in progress flag is ON (S20602: YES), this through ball entry processing is ended.

  In step S20604, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) is moved to the motorized product execution area 64e. Thereafter, the ball insertion process for through is finished.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is performed.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20701, start-up processing is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20702.

  In step S20702, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demonstration moving image upon power-on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20703.

  In step S20703, output data such as a start-up command set in step S20702 or a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process previously executed is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 70. Also, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. After executing step S20703, the process proceeds to step S20704.

  In step S20704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20705.

  In step S20705, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20706. In step S20706, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In the game number control process, the winning lottery, the setting of the fluctuation display of the symbol by the symbol display device 41, the display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S20706, the process proceeds to step S20707.

  In step S20707, a gaming state transition process is executed to shift the gaming state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20708.

  In step S20708, a process for supporting the electric combination for driving and controlling the normal electric combination 53 is executed. In the electronic-support-support process, it is determined whether or not the ordinary motor-operated part 53 is to be in the open state. The details of the processing for electronic mail support will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20709.

  In step S20709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly, the start of the command output processing in step S20703). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has come. If it is determined in step S20709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S20709: NO), the next normal processing execution timing is reached in steps S20710 and S20711. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S20711, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S20709: YES), the process returns to step S20703, and each process from step S20703 to step S20708 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S20703 to step S20708 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly executing updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using such remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 48: S20706).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step S20801, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open / close execution mode and turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode.

  When it is determined in step S20801 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S20801: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and the main game control is performed without executing any of the processes in step S20802 and thereafter. End the process. That is, when in the opening / closing execution mode, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not the special figure starting opening 51 has entered the ball. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20802.

  In step S20802, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is in a variable display mode. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variation display flag of the variation display flag storage area in the various big hit flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display in progress flag is turned on when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is completed.

  If it is determined in step S20802 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying the variable display (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to the processing for starting the game play of step S20803 to step S20805. In step S20803, it is determined whether the pending number CRN is "0". In the case where the reserved number CRN is "0", the reserved number is "0" for any of the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) and the second start port 34. means. Therefore, when it is determined in step S20803 that the number of held CRN is "0" (S20803: YES), the game play control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20803 that the hold count CRN is not "0" (S20803: NO), the flow proceeds to step S20804.

  In step S20804, data setting processing for setting data stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S20805, fluctuation start processing for starting fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the change start process will be described later. After executing step S20805, the present game play control process ends.

  When it is determined in step S20802 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S20802: YES), the processing for the game play progression in step S20806 to step S20815 is executed.

  In step S20806, it is determined whether the variation time of the current game has elapsed. The fluctuation time is, as described above, a time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows are stopped, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20806, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 52) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  If it is determined in step S20806 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S20806: NO), the process advances to step S20807 to execute fluctuation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit according to the current game run. After executing step S20807, the game number control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S20806 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S20806: YES), the process advances to step S20808 to execute fluctuation end processing. In the end process of fluctuation, the symbol display unit is displayed so that the symbol display unit to be displayed in the symbol display unit determined in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 51) to be described later is displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game run. Display control. After executing step S20808, the process proceeds to step S20809.

  In step S20809, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation jackpot B flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot B flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag A, the 8R normal jackpot A flag) is ON. . In step S20809, if any of the jackpot flags is ON (S20809: YES), the process proceeds to step S20810.

  In step S20810, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game play control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20809 that neither of the jackpot flags is ON (S20809: NO), the process proceeds to step S20811.

  In step S20811, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

  In step S20812, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step S20812 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S20812: NO), the game play control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S20812 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S20812: YES), the process proceeds to step S20813, and it is determined whether the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is zero.

  When it is determined in step S20813 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is not 0 (S20813: NO), the game number control process is ended. If it is determined in step S20813 that the value of the game number counter PNC is 0 (S20813: YES), the process proceeds to step S20814, and the high frequency support mode flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20815 to set a low frequency support mode command. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703). The voice emission control device 90 that has received the low frequency support mode command recognizes that the support mode has shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and performs the rendering corresponding to the low frequency support mode. After executing step S20815, the game number control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 49: S20804).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S <b> 20901, it is determined whether the hold area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, of the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 32), the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) Information) is stored in the first holding area of the second holding area Rb (the first holding area stored in the second holding area Rb (FIG. 32)). When it is stored in the hold area prior to the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information among the hold information stored first in the first hold area Ra is the first among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb than the hold information first stored among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra. If the stored hold information is stored earlier in the hold area, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20901, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  When it is determined in step S20901 that the pending area to be processed is the first pending area Ra (step S20901: YES), the data setting process for the first pending area in steps S20902 to S20907 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S 20901 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S 20901: NO And the data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S20908 to S20913.

  In step S20902, after decrementing the first start pending number RaN of the first pending area Ra by one, the process proceeds to step S20903, where the total pending number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20904. In step S20904, the data stored in the first area of the first reserve area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20905.

  In step S20905, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reserve area Ra is performed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S20905, the process proceeds to step S20906.

  In step S20906, when the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is the target of the start of the current variable display. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20907.

  In step S20907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserve area subject to the current data shift corresponds to the first reserve area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first starting port 33. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S20907 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice light emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. Do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  If it is determined in step S20901 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S20901: NO), The process advances to step S20908.

  In step S20908, the second start reservation number RbN of the second storage area Rb is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20909. In step S20909, the total pending number CRN is decremented by one, and in step S20910, the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20911.

  In step S20911, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reserve area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S20911, the process proceeds to step S20912.

  In step S20912, when the second symbol display area flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is set ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step S20913.

  In step S20913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserved area which is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S20913 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held pieces based on the received shift command. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of game number control process (FIG. 49: S20805).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the change start process. In step S21001, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and in the present embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the open / close execution mode relating to winning of the probability variation jackpot. After that, it is usually turned off when the jackpot is won. When it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is the high probability mode (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21002.

  In step S21002, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the high probability table for high probability mode shown in FIG. Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21004. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003.

  In step S21003, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21004.

  In step S21004, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of success (hit lottery) in step S21002 or step S21003 is a big hit. In step S21004, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S21004: YES), in step S21005 to step S21012, in order to set the processing and stop result for setting the game result in the case of a big hit Execute the process of

  In step S21005, it is determined whether the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S21005 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the process proceeds to step S21006, and the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 35A) is referred. Then, a distribution determination is made. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot B, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot A, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot A Determine if it exists.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21005 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21007, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 35 (b)) Perform the distribution judgment with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot B, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot B, or 8R normal jackpot B Do. After performing the process of step S21006 or step S21007. The process proceeds to step S21008.

  In step S21008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S21008 that the game result is a probability change jackpot (S21008: YES), the process proceeds to step S21009.

  In step S21009, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. With the stop result setting process for the probability variation big hit, it fluctuates in the state where any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round that will win the probability variation big hit It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21009, the process proceeds to step S21010.

  In step S21010, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R probability variation big hit B flag is turned ON when the 16R probability variation big hit B, and the 8R probability variation big hit B flag is ON when the 8R probability variation big hit B, and the 8R probability variation big hit A 8R probability variation jackpot A flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21008 that the type of jackpot allocated in step S21006 or step S21007 is not a probability variation jackpot (S21008: NO), that is, if the allocated jackpot type is normally jackpot, the step It progresses to S21011.

  In step S21011, a stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process fluctuates in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where a normal jackpot will be won. It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21011, the process proceeds to step S21012.

  In step S21012, a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 (a jackpot type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, the 8R normal big hit B flag is turned ON when the 8R normal big hit B, and the 8R normal big hit A flag is turned ON when the 8R normal big hit A is. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  If it is determined in step S21004 that the result of the jackpot lottery in step S21002 or step S21003 is not a jackpot winning (S21004: NO), the process proceeds to step S21013, and it is determined whether reach occurs in the game time. Specifically, in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the reach occurrence. It is determined whether or not you

  In step S21013, when it is determined that the reach occurs in the game run (S21013: YES), the process proceeds to step S21014.

  In step S21014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. In the current game round, which is the stop result for the reach, in the process to set which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. is there. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21014, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  If it is determined in step S21013 that the reach does not occur in the game run (S21013: NO), the process proceeds to step S21015.

  In step S21015, stop result setting processing for removal is executed. With the stop result setting process for out of time, the fluctuation display is ended in the state where any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the out result is obtained. Is a process for setting the Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for disconnection at the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21015, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  In step S21016, setting processing of fluctuation time is executed. The setting process of the fluctuation time is to set fluctuation time which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b based on the presence or absence of the big hit and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Processing. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

  In step S21017, it is determined whether the 2nd symbol display part flag of RAM64 is ON. If it is determined in step S21017 that the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S21017: NO), the process proceeds to step S21018, and the first variation command is set. The command for the first change is that the current game time relates to the hold information acquired based on entering the ball into the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) While including the information to show, the information on the existence of reach and the information on the fluctuation time set up at Step S21016 are included.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21017 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21019, and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence And the information on the fluctuation time set in step S21016. After executing step S21018 or step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

  In step S21020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on presence or absence of reach occurrence as a result of the presence or absence of the jackpot and the distribution determination. That is, in the type command, information of 16R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot A information, 8R normal jackpot B information, 8R normal jackpot A information, or information of type of jackpot , Information on presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on outliers are included.

  The fluctuation command and type command set in step S21018 to step S21020 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received command for variation and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

  In step S21021, the variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game round among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started, If the second symbol display portion flag is ON, it is determined that the result display portion corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display portion 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S21021, the variation start process is ended.

<Setting process of fluctuation time>
Next, setting processing of the fluctuation time will be described. The setting process of the fluctuation time is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 51: S21016) of the fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the fluctuation time. In step S21101, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21102.

  In step S21102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON (S21102: YES), the process proceeds to step S21103.

  In step S21103, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  If it is determined in step S21102 that the winning lottery for the current game is not selected (S21102: NO), the process proceeds to step S21104 to determine whether reach is generated in the current game. Since the main processing (S21104) is executed when the winning lottery for the current game round is not won in step S21102 above, in step S21104 a reach occurs among the gaming rounds not winning the winning lottery It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S21104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S21105. In addition, in specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S21105, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In step S21104, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game round (S21104: NO), the process proceeds to step S21106 and refers to the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table indicates that the fluctuation time is larger as the values of the first start reservation number RaN and the second start reservation number RbN are larger. It is set to be short. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start reservation number RaN and the second start reservation number RbN when determining the fluctuation time of the game time Is different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start reservation number RaN and the second start reservation number RbN increase. In the other configuration, for example, the variation time may be set to be shorter as the value of the total pending number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. The variation time may increase as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-occurrence so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode A variation time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the regular jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the outreach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete outlier may be individually set.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 48: S20707) of normal processing.

  FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the game state transition process. In step S21201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S21201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S21202, and it is determined whether the open / close processing period flag is ON. As described above, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON when shifting the gaming state to the open / close processing period, and is turned OFF when the open / close processing period is ended.

  When it is determined in step S21202 that the opening / closing processing period flag is not ON (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S21203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  When it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21203: NO), the process proceeds to step S21204, and it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game cycle which is triggered to start the open / close execution mode is ended, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21204 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21204 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S21204: NO), the gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  In step S21205, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to set the lottery mode in execution of the open / close execution mode triggered by winning to the jackpot to the low probability mode. After executing step S21205, the process proceeds to step S21206.

  In step S21206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. The high frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to set the support mode in execution of the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low frequency support mode. After executing step S21206, the process proceeds to step S21207.

  In step S21207, an open / close execution mode start command is set. The open / close execution mode start command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the open / close execution mode is started triggered by the jackpot winning. The open / close execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703). After executing step S21207, the process proceeds to step S21208.

  In step S21208, an open / close scenario setting process is performed. The open / close scenario setting process is a process for setting an open / close scenario in which an open pattern of the open / close door 54b in the round game is set. In the present embodiment, the open time of the open / close door 54b in one round game is 30 seconds. However, even before 30 seconds have passed after the opening and closing door 54b is opened, if nine gaming balls enter the large winning opening 54a, the opening and closing door 54b is closed. In the present embodiment, such an open pattern of the open / close door 54b is set as the open / close scenario. In the opening and closing scenario setting process, an opening and closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. For example, if 16R probability variation big hit B, the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 54b for 16 rounds is set as the opening and closing scenario, and if 8R probability variation big hitting A, the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 54b for 8 rounds is opening scenario It is set to. After executing step S21208, the process proceeds to step S21209.

  In step S21209, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the opening timer counter area as the opening time. After executing step S21209, the process proceeds to step S21210.

  In step S21210, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot that triggered the execution of the current switching execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S21210, the process advances to step S21211 to turn on the opening period flag. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is ON (S21203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21212.

  In step S21212, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter area T set in the opening time setting process is “0”. If it is determined in step S21212 that the opening period has ended (S21212: YES), the process proceeds to step S21213, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S21214.

  In step S21214, a round display start process is performed to notify of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step S21214, the process proceeds to step S21215.

  In step S21215, the open / close processing period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21202 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (S21202: YES), the process proceeds to step S21216, and the special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step S21216, the process proceeds to step S21217.

  In step S21217, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening / closing process has ended. If it is determined that the special winning opening / closing process has ended (S21217: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21217 that the special winning opening / closing process has not ended (S21217: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  In step S21218, the open / close processing period flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S21219.

  In step S21219, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S21219, the process proceeds to step S21220.

  In step S21220, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) of the ending period in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the ending timer counter as the ending time. After executing step S21220, the process proceeds to step S21221.

  In step S21221, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 at step 40703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice emission control device 90 starts the effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S21221, the process proceeds to step S21222.

  In step S21222, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21201 that the ending period flag is ON (S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21223.

  In step S21223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21220), it is determined whether the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is “0” (S21223: YES), the process proceeds to step S21224.

  In step S21224, the ending period flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game play after the ending of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21225, the process advances to step S21226 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21227 to set an open / close execution mode end command. The open / close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control apparatus 90 that the open / close execution mode has ended. The open / close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is not "0" (S21223: NO), the present game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Big winning opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 53: S21216).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S21301, it is determined whether the open / close door 54b is open. When it is determined in step S21301 that the open / close door 54b is not open (S21301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21302.

  In step S21302, it is determined whether the open condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied. Specifically, the open / close scenario set by the open / close scenario setting process (FIG. 53: S21208) is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing of opening the open / close door 54b. If it is determined in step S21302 that the opening condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21303.

  In step S21303, the open / close door 54b is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21304.

  In step S21304, an open / close door open command is set. The open / close door open command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close door 54b is opened. The open / close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: S20703) of the normal process. After executing step S21304, the present special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S21302 that the opening condition of the open / close door 54b is not satisfied (S21302: NO), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S21301 that the open / close door 54b is being opened (S21301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305.

  In step S21305, it is determined whether the closing condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied. The closing condition of the opening and closing door 54b is the number of times the continuous opening time (30 seconds in this embodiment) of the opening and closing door 54b set in the opening and closing scenario has elapsed or the number set in advance for the big winning opening 54a In the form, it is established when it is detected that nine game balls have entered. If it is determined in step S21305 that the closing condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied (S21305: YES), the process proceeds to step S21306.

  In step S21306, the open / close door 54b is closed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21307.

  In step S21307, an open / close door close command is set. The open / close door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close door 54b is closed. The open / close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: S20303) of the normal process. After executing step S21307, the present special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S21305 that the closing condition of the open / close door 54b is not satisfied (S21305: NO), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is.

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 53: S21225).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to the probable variation jackpot as the jackpot flag is set to ON in the RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S21401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probable variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402, and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After executing step S21402, the process proceeds to step S21403.

  In step S21403, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step S21403, the process proceeds to step S21404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probable variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is not ON (S21401: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21404.

  In step S21404, the high frequency support mode flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned ON. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot flag, and if the determined jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot B and 8R probability variation jackpot B, the high-frequency support mode B flag is turned ON, and the determined jackpot type is 8R In the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. After executing step S21404, the process proceeds to step S21405.

  In step S21405, a high frequency support mode command corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, the high frequency support mode A command or the high frequency support mode B command is set. The set command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703).

  In step S21406, processing for erasing (turning off) the jackpot flag is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21407.

  In step S21407, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for telegraph support>
Next, a process for electronic mail support will be described. The processing for electronic part support is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for normal processing (FIG. 48: S20708).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the electronic-support-support process. In step S21501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag of the various big hit flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the normal motor-operated part 53 is opened, and is turned off when the closed state is restored. If it is determined in step S21501 that the in-support flag is not ON (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21502.

  In step S21502, it is determined whether the support winning flag of the various big hit flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the opening status is won in the electric position opening lottery in whether or not the ordinary electric power steering wheel 53 is opened, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is a flag. When it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21502: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

  In step S21503, it is determined whether the value of the power unit timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electronic gear timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. Every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, 1 is subtracted from the count value set in the power unit timer counter Td, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  In step S21503, when it is determined that the value of the power-supply timer counter Td is not "0" (S21503: NO), the processing for electric-power-piece support is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power unit timer counter Td is "0" (S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

  In step S21504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S21504 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S21504: YES), the process proceeds to step S21505, and the off display is set. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21506, and the electronic part processing in progress flag is set to OFF. After execution of step S21506, the present support processing for electric power transmission is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21504 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S21504: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507.

  In step S21507, it is determined whether the electronic processing for a process in progress flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electronic processing for flag is not ON (S21507: NO), the electronic control support processing is ended. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electronic processing for a process is in progress is ON (S21507: YES), the process proceeds to step S21508.

  In step S21508, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S21509, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is not the open / close execution mode at step S21508 (S21508: NO) and if it is the high frequency support mode at step S21509 (S21509: YES), the process proceeds to step S21510, and an electric combination open lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the motorized product release counter C4 moved to the motorized product execution area 64e in the ball entry process for through (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 to 461, the motorized product is released. A lottery is won (see FIG. 36 (b)). Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set to the electric-arm timer counter Td. As described in FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, since the fluctuation time in the electric wave open lottery is 0.05 seconds, the electric wave timer counter Td is “25” (ie 0. 0. Set 05 sec). The timer counter Td is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21511.

  In step S21511, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination opening lottery in step S21510 is support winning. In step S21511, when it is determined that the result of the motorized combination opening lottery is the support winning (S21511: YES), the process proceeds to step S21512, and the support winning flag is turned ON. After executing step S21512, the process proceeds to step S21513.

  In step S21513, the setting process of the high frequency support mode electric utility vehicle open / close scenario according to the type of high frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting the open / close scenario in which the open pattern of the ordinary motorized symbol 53 is set in the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B) when winning the motorized symbol opening lottery. It is. Specifically, when the high frequency support mode A flag is ON, the high frequency support mode A electronic gear switching scenario is set. The high frequency support mode A electric utility player open / close scenario is set to perform the opening of the normal electric power object 53 once when the electric power item open lottery is won in the high frequency support mode A, and the normal electric power Under the condition that 3 seconds have elapsed in the opening state of the accessory 53 or that one gaming ball is inserted into the second starting opening 34, it is set that the normal motorized accessory 53 is closed (see FIG. 37). ). On the other hand, when the high frequency support mode B flag is ON, the high frequency support mode B electronic gear switching scenario is set. The high frequency support mode B electric utility player open / close scenario is set to perform the opening of the normal electric power object 53 once when the electric power item open lottery is won during the high frequency support mode B, and Under the condition that 6 seconds have elapsed in the opening state of the accessory 53 or that one gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 34, it is set to close the ordinary motorized accessory 53 (see FIG. 37). ). After executing step S21513, the electric-car support process ends.

  If it is determined in step S21508 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S21508: YES), or if it is determined in step S21509 that the high frequency support mode is not in effect (S21509: NO), the process proceeds to step S21514.

  In step S21514, a motorized combination open lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the motorized product release counter C4 moved to the motorized product execution area 64e in the ball entry process for through (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 or 1, the motorized product is released. A lottery will be won (see FIG. 36A). At the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "5000" (i.e., 10.0 sec) is set in the electric-arm timer counter Td. As described in FIG. 37, in the low-frequency support mode, since the fluctuation time in the electronic combination release lottery is 10 seconds, “5000” (that is, 10.0 seconds) is set to the electronic-arm timer counter Td. The timer counter Td is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21515.

  In step S21515, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S21514 is support winning. If it is determined in step S21515 that no support win has been made (S21515: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21515 that support is won (S21515: YES), the process proceeds to step S21516, and the support winning flag is set to ON. After executing step S21516, the process proceeds to step S21517.

  In step S21517, a setting process of the low frequency support mode electric utility player open / close scenario is executed. The present process is a process of setting an open / close scenario in which an open pattern of the ordinary electric power combination product 53 is set when an electric combination product open lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode electric utility player open / close scenario is set to perform opening of the normal electric power part 53 once when the electric part open lottery is won in the low frequency support mode, and Under the condition that 3 seconds have elapsed in the open state of 53 or that one gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 34, it is set to close the normal motorized role 53 (see FIG. 37). After executing step S21517, the electric-car support process ends.

  In step S21502, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (S21502: YES), the process proceeds to step S21518, and it is determined whether the value of the power unit timer counter Td is “0”. In this case, the electronic gear timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. In step S21518, when it is determined that the value of the electric-arm timer counter Td is not "0" (S21518: NO), since the fluctuation display of the pattern in the common-use drawing unit 38 is performed, the processing for electronic-armor support is as it is. Finish. On the other hand, in step S21518, when it is determined that the value of the battery short timer counter Td is "0" (S21518: YES), the process proceeds to step S21519.

  In step S21519, a hit display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the drawing unit 38 is ended in a state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21520, the support in progress flag is turned on, and the support winning flag is turned off. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  In step S21501, when it is determined that the in-support flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21521, and the electric combination open / close process for opening / closing control of the normal motorized combination 53 is performed. The details of the electronic locker process will be described later. After executing step S21521, the process proceeds to step S21522.

  In step S21522, it is determined whether or not the electronic combination opening and closing process has ended. If it is determined in step S21522 that the electronic combination opening and closing process has not ended (S21522: NO), the electronic combination support processing ends as it is. In step S21522, when it is determined that the electronic combination opening and closing process is finished (S21522: YES), the process proceeds to step S21523, and the in-support flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21524, and the electronic processing for processing execution flag is set to OFF. After executing step S21524, the electric-car support process ends.

<Electronic work opening and closing process>
Next, electronic locker opening and closing processing will be described. The electronic combination opening and closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 56: S21521) of electronic combination support processing.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electronic combination opening and closing process. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the ordinary motor-operated symbol 53 is open. If it is determined in step S21601 that the ordinary motor-operated combination 53 is not open (S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21602.

  In step S21602, it is determined whether the open condition of the set open / close scenario is satisfied. Specifically, while counting the number of times the ordinary electric jack 53 is opened (one in the present embodiment) in the case of winning one electronic combination open lottery, the closed state of the ordinary electric jack 53 is maintained. By counting whether the time has elapsed and the timing for opening has been reached by the timer counter, it is determined whether or not a condition for shifting the normal motor-operated part 53 to the opening state is satisfied. If it is determined in step S21602 that the open condition of the open / close scenario is not satisfied (S21602: NO), the electronic combination open / close process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21602 that the open condition of the open / close scenario is satisfied (S21602: YES), the process proceeds to step S21603.

  In step S21603, the normal motorized symbol 53 is opened. After executing step S21603, the process proceeds to step S21604.

  In step S21604, a power release command is set. The power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703). The voice light-emitting device that has received the electronic combination release command executes setting for executing effects for opening the electronic combination. Thereafter, the electronic open and close processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21601 that the normal motorized combination 53 is not in the open state (S21601: YES), the process proceeds to step S21605.

  In step S21605, it is determined whether the closing condition of the normal motorized combination 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the normal motorized symbol 53 in the high frequency support mode A is that "three seconds have passed in the open state" or that one game ball is in the open state of the commonly used symbol 53. It is that either one of "having entered the second starting opening 34" is established. The closing condition of the normal motorized symbol 53 in the high frequency support mode B is that "the six seconds have elapsed in the open state" or "one gaming ball is in the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary motorized symbol 53 is opened. It is that either one of "being entered the ball" is established. The closing condition of the normal motorized symbol 53 in the low frequency support mode is that "three seconds have elapsed in the open state" or "one gaming ball is in the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary motorized symbol 53 is opened. It is that either one of "it has entered the ball" is established. If it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is not satisfied (S21605: NO), the electronic combination opening and closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is satisfied (S21605: YES), the process proceeds to step S21606.

  In step S21606, the normal motorized jack 53 is closed. After executing step S21606, the process proceeds to step S21607.

  In step S21607, a power-supply closing command is set. The electronic combination close command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703). The voice light-emitting device that has received the electronic combination closing command performs setting for executing effects for closing the electronic combination. Thereafter, the electronic open and close processing ends.

B5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. Note that part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted.

  The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 60 and the rendering operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 are the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S21701, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main side MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S21701, the process proceeds to step S21702.

  In step S21702, a state storage process is performed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as the flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step S21702, the process proceeds to step S21703.

  In step S21703, support mode effect processing is executed. The support mode effect process is a process for setting a background moving image and an audio to be output separately from the effect for each game cycle depending on the type of support mode. Details of the support mode rendering process will be described later. After executing step S21703, the process proceeds to step S21704.

  In step S21704, a game turn effect process is executed. The game turn effect process is a process for setting an effect to be executed every game turn. Details of the processing for the game production effect will be described later. After executing step S21704, the process proceeds to step S21705.

  In step S21705, another display process is performed. The other display processing is processing for executing various settings relating to display and the like based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when the hold command is received from the main side MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds is performed. After executing step S21705, the process proceeds to step S21706.

  In step S21706, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the various lamps 47 is performed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the process of steps S21703 to S21705. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponding to the effect set in steps S21703 to S21705 is obtained. After executing step S21706, the process proceeds to step S21707.

  In step S21707, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is performed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the process of steps S21703 to S21705. That is, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed such that audio corresponding to the effect set in steps S21703 to S21705 is output. After executing step S21707, the present timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<State storage process>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state storage processing is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21702).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state storage process. The state storage process is a process for storing the state of the game being executed in the sound emission control device 90. The state storage process is roughly composed of three processes. Specifically, steps S21801 to S21804 are processing for storing whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed. Steps S21805 to S21808 are processing for storing whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Steps S21809 to S21818 are processing for storing whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, the high frequency support mode B, or the low frequency support mode.

  In step S21801, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode end command has been received. The open / close execution mode end command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode is ended. If it is determined in step S21801 that the open / close execution mode end command has been received (S21801: YES), the process proceeds to step S21802 to turn off the open / close execution mode execution flag. The opening / closing execution mode execution flag is a flag for storing whether the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and is turned ON when the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is started, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. It is a flag that is turned on. After executing step S21802, the process proceeds to step S21803.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21801 that the open / close execution mode end command has not been received (S21801: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21803.

  In step S21803, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode start command has been received. The open / close execution mode start command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode is started. If it is determined in step S21803 that the open / close execution mode start command has been received (S21803: YES), the process advances to step S21804 to turn on the open / close execution mode execution flag. After executing step S21804, the process proceeds to step S21805.

  When it is determined in step S21803 that the opening / closing execution mode start command has not been received (S21803: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21805.

  In step S21805, it is determined whether the high probability mode command has been received. The high probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode ends and the high probability mode is started. If it is determined in step S21805 that the high probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step S21806 to turn on the sound light high probability mode flag. The sound side high probability mode flag is a flag for storing whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing step S21806, the process proceeds to step S21807.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21805 that the high probability mode command is not received (S21805: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21807.

  In step S21807, it is determined whether a low probability mode command has been received. The low probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21807 that the low probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step S21808 to turn off the sound light side high probability mode flag. After executing step S21808, the process proceeds to step S21809.

  When it is determined in step S21807 that the low probability mode command is not received (S21807: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21809.

  In step S21809, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A command has been received. The high frequency support mode A command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A. If it is determined in step S21809 that the high frequency support mode A command has been received (S21809: YES), the process proceeds to step S21810.

  In step S21810, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. The sound side high frequency support mode B flag is a flag which is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B, and turned off when the high frequency support mode B shifts to another support mode. . If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21810: YES), the process proceeds to step S21811, and the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21812.

  When it is determined in step S21810 that the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is not ON (S21810: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21812.

  In step S21812, the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is set to ON. The sound side high frequency support mode A flag is a flag which is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A, and turned off when the high frequency support mode A shifts to another support mode . After executing step S21812, the process proceeds to step S21813.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21809 that the high frequency support mode A command has not been received (S21809: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21813.

  In step S21813, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode B command has been received. The high frequency support mode B command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B. If it is determined in step S21813 that the high frequency support mode B command has been received (S21813: YES), the process proceeds to step S21814.

  In step S21814, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is on (S21814: YES), the process proceeds to step S21815, and the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21816.

  When it is determined in step S21814 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21814: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21816.

  In step S21816, the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is set to ON. After executing step S21816, the process proceeds to step S21817.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21813 that the high-frequency support mode B command has not been received (S21813: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21817.

  In step S21817, it is determined whether a low frequency support mode command has been received. The low frequency support mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21817 that the low frequency support mode command has been received (S21817: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818.

  In step S 21818, the flag that is ON among the sound side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned off. Thereafter, the state storage process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21817 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (S21817: NO), the state storage processing is ended as it is.

<Process for support mode effect>
Next, the support mode effect processing will be described. The support mode effect processing is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21703).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a process for support mode effect production. In step S21901, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode in-progress flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21901 that the open / close execution mode in-progress flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process proceeds to step S21902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21901 that the open / close execution mode in-progress flag is ON (S21901: YES), the support mode effect processing ends.

  In step S21902, it is determined whether the sound-side high-frequency support mode A flag or the sound-side high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21902 that neither the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is on (S21902: NO), the process proceeds to step S21903.

  In step S21903, setting processing of an effect pattern for the low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode, a video or a sound that urges the sorting mechanism 120 to enter the game ball by striking left is different from the effects for each game cycle (game times effect) The processing is to set the contents to be output as the background video and the background music as the effect pattern in order to output the background video and the background music. After step S21903 is executed, the support mode effect process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21902 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is on (S21902: YES), the process proceeds to step S21904.

  In step S21904, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. When it is determined in step S21904 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21904: YES), the process proceeds to step S21905.

  In step S21905, a setting process of effect patterns for the high frequency support mode A is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, a video or a sound prompting the player to make the distribution mechanism 120 enter the game ball by left-handling, effects for each game cycle (game times effect It is a process for setting the contents to be output as the background image and the background music as an effect pattern, in order to output the background image and the background music separately from. Compared to the low-frequency support mode, the status of the high-frequency support mode A has a high percentage of game balls entering the second starting opening 34, and may be given more advantageous benefits when winning a big hit Because of the nature, the presentation for the high frequency support mode A is a presentation of content that further gives the player a sense of expectation compared to the presentation for the low frequency support mode. After step S21905 is executed, the support mode effect process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21904: NO), the process proceeds to step S21906.

  In step S <b> 21906, setting processing of an effect pattern for the high frequency support mode B is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, a video or a sound prompting the player to make the through gate 35b pass the game ball right by hitting the right, and the effect (game turn effect) for each game turn Is a process for setting the content to be output as the background image and the background music as the effect pattern in order to output the background image and the background music separately. Compared to the high-frequency support mode A, the state of the high-frequency support mode B has a high proportion of game balls entering the second starting opening 34, and an advantageous benefit is awarded when winning a big hit Since there is a possibility, the effect for the high frequency support mode B is an effect of the content that gives the player a sense of expectation much more than the effect for the high frequency support mode A. After step S21906 is executed, the support mode effect process is ended.

<Process of the game turn effect>
Next, the game turn effect processing will be described. The processing for the game number effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21704).

  FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing processing for the game turn effect. In step S22001, it is determined whether a variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S22001 that the variation command has been received (S22001: YES), the process proceeds to step S22002.

  In step S22002, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from the command, information of presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of reach occurrence, and fluctuation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22003.

  In step S22003, an effect pattern setting process is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the presentation in the game time which is a process target. Details of setting processing of the effect pattern will be described later. After executing step S22003, the process proceeds to step S22004.

  In step S22004, setting processing of liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the lottery for the current game is a big hit, the information corresponding to the stop result that the combination of the same symbol is established on the effective line L1 is the current liquid crystal Set as symbol information. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game is out of the game, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether the reach has occurred. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L1, which corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbol is established on the effective line L1. The information is determined as the information on the result of the current stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same combination of symbols does not hold on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of reach symbols does not hold on the active line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the liquid crystal symbol of this time. After executing step S22004, the process proceeds to step S22005.

  In step S22005, a game play effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The game turn effect command is information including the effect pattern set in step S22003 and the content of the liquid crystal symbol to be stopped set in step S22004. The display control device 100 that has received the game turn effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image for effect and an image of a liquid crystal symbol based on the information included in the game turn command. After executing step S22005, the process proceeds to step S22006.

  In step S22006, a process of updating pending information is executed. In the hold information update process, the information of the hold number counter area is updated so that the hold number stored in the hold number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S22008, the game-time effect processing ends.

<Processing for setting the presentation pattern>
Next, setting processing of the effect pattern will be described. The setting process of the effect pattern is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 62: S22003) of the processing for playing game effect.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing setting processing of an effect pattern. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the effect is to be set wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot included in the received variation command. In step S22101, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is won in the winning lot in the winning lottery (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102.

  In step S22102, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the effect is to be set is hit in the random selection in the win lottery. If it is determined in step S22102 that the probability variation jackpot has been won (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

  In step S22103, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the gaming round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is jackpot B. If it is determined in step S22103 that the jackpot type of the gaming round in which the jackpot is the processing target has been won is jackpot B (S22103: YES), the process proceeds to step S22104.

  In step S22104, a setting process of the effect pattern for the probability variation big hit B is executed. When the odds are won, the game times to be executed from the next time is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is set. Therefore, since the probability variation jackpot B is a jackpot that is extremely advantageous to the player, the effect pattern for the probability variation jackpot B is set to a content that gives the player a high sense of expectation. After executing step S22104, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S22103 that the jackpot type of the gaming round in which the jackpot is the processing target is not the jackpot B (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105.

  In step S22105, a setting process of the effect pattern for the probability variation big hit A is executed. After executing step S22105, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S22102 that the probability variation jackpot has not been won (S22102: NO), the process proceeds to step S22106. In step S22106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the gaming round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is jackpot B. If it is determined in step S22106 that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is the jackpot type B (S22106: YES), the process proceeds to step S22107.

  In step S22107, a process of setting an effect pattern for a normal jackpot B is executed. After executing step S22107, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S22106 that the jackpot type of the gaming round in which the jackpot to be processed is won is not the jackpot B (S22106: NO), the process proceeds to step S22108.

  In step S22108, a process of setting an effect pattern for the normal jackpot A is executed. After executing step S22108, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S22101 that the game round to be processed has not won the jackpot in the winning lottery (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109.

  In step S22109, setting processing of an effect pattern for removal is executed. After executing step S22109, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S22201, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22202.

  In step S22202, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing thereafter executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing command interruption processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S22301, a command storage process is performed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing performed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 draws the image and Execute the instructions on the display.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds for which drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not finished, so the drawing of a new image is started or displayed while drawing the image. It is possible to suppress the development of the image accompanying the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the middle is stored. The details of the process of each step of the V interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S22401, a command handling process is performed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 65), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a rendering command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the rendering mode specified by the rendering command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If a rendering operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering operation Control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S22401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. The command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effects such as the notice effect set by the sound emission control device 90 and the liquid crystal design, etc. The drawing of an image can be controlled to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S22402, display setting processing is performed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S22401) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the symbol display device 41 . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22403.

  In step S22403, task processing is performed. In task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S22402), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle and the like are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22404.

  In step S22404, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S22403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 performs drawing processing of an image based on these pieces of information, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing, together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S22405, and after the other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball entered from the opening 122 by the distribution mechanism 120 is distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, although Even when the distributed game balls enter the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b, the same symbol (the first symbol) is varied, and therefore, they are distributed. Unexpectedness can be given to a player who has estimated that a different symbol changes for each ball entry portion (starting opening). In addition, the player may make various guesses about the role (purpose of installation) of the sorting mechanism 120 for guiding the ball entry portion (starting opening) to change the same symbol even though it is assigned to two paths. it can.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with the normal motorized role 53 on the path through which the gaming ball flows from the right side flow path R2 to the first starting opening 33b, the distribution mechanism 120 causes the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path No matter which R2 is distributed, the game balls distributed to whichever trigger the same symbol (first symbol) will also trigger the game ball distributed to the right side flow path R2 is a normal motorized role thing 53 may trigger a change in the second symbol, and even in the same distribution mode that causes the game ball to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the first symbol and the second symbol change depending on the type of support mode. It is possible to make the ratio to be made different. That is, by controlling the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery that determines whether or not the normally-operated electronic combination 53 is released, the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol can be made different. .

  More specifically, the ordinary electric character 53 can be considered as a distribution mechanism that distributes the gaming balls having flowed out from the opening 124 into the first starting opening 33b and the second starting opening 34, and the pachinko machine in the present embodiment It can be considered that the machine 10 is provided with two distributing mechanisms of the distributing mechanism 120 and the common motorized part 53. Then, the probability that the normal motorized symbol 53 that functions as a distribution mechanism operates is the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery, and therefore, can be changed by changing the support mode. Therefore, even when the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the gaming balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 to the left flow passage R1 and the right flow passage R2, the ordinary electric role product 53 that functions as the distribution mechanism The first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate by changing the probability that the game ball distributed to the right channel R2 is distributed to the second starting opening 34 (that is, the winning probability of the electronic combination opening lottery). The ratio can be changed. For example, in the case where the probability that the normal motorized role thing 53 distributes the game ball to the second starting opening 34 (the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery) is set low (in the case of the low frequency support mode) The game balls distributed to the flow path R1 are caused to enter the first starting opening 33a, and the first symbol is varied. And since the game ball distributed to right channel R2 has a low winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery, it is possible to cause the first starting opening 33b to enter the ball with high probability and change the first symbol. That is, the game ball having reached the distribution mechanism 120 is caused to enter the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) with high probability, and the first symbol is changed with high probability (frequency) It can be done.

  On the other hand, when the probability that the normal motorized role thing 53 distributes the game ball to the second starting opening 34 (the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery) is set high (in the case of high frequency support mode A), the distribution mechanism 120 The game balls distributed to the left flow passage R1 are caused to enter the first starting opening 33a, and the first symbol is varied. And since the game ball distributed to right channel R2 has a high winning probability of the electric part opening lottery, it can be made to enter the second starting opening 34 with high probability, and the second symbol can be changed. Thus, by changing the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery, it is possible to change the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol even if the distribution mode of the game balls is the same.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with the through gate 35b separately from the through gate 35a disposed inside the distribution mechanism 120 as a through gate serving as a trigger for executing the electric part opening lottery, the distribution mechanism Even in the distribution mode of the gaming ball not passing through 120, the ordinary electric actor 53 can be opened. As a result, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball can be made to enter the second starting opening 34 with high probability by distributing the game ball in the distribution mode passing through the through gate 35 b.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can realize the following. In the low frequency support mode, when the player distributes the gaming ball so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b, and the second starting opening Since the possibility of the game ball entering the ball 34 is low, it is possible to change only the first symbol with high probability. When the player distributes the game ball so that the player reaches the distribution mechanism 120 in the high frequency support mode A, there is a high possibility that the game ball enters the first start opening 33a and the second start opening 34. Therefore, the first symbol and the second symbol can be varied. In the high-frequency support mode B, when the player distributes the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, since the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 34 only, the first probability is high with a high probability. Only 2 symbols can be changed. As a result, at least three of the gaming states in which only the first symbol fluctuates with high probability, the gaming states in which the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate, and the gaming states in which only the second symbol fluctuates with high probability You can create a state.

  In other words, when the gaming balls are circulated in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the gaming balls to the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) per unit time. The relative ratio between the number of ball entry and the number of ball entry into the second starting opening 34 can be controlled to be changeable in at least three stages. Therefore, by combining the three-step ball entry relative ratio (game state), it is possible to create a new variety of game flows, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Although the flow of the above-described game has been described, the effects of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described in comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. First, in the case of winning a winning lottery (including a big hit and a small hit if a small hit is set) in the winning lottery that was executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first starting port The expected value of the benefit (for example, the number of winning balls to be paid out) is given as the first benefit expected value, and it is hit in the winning lottery executed with the game ball entering the second starting opening as a win (big hit, And, when the small hitting is set, the expected value of the benefit (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given when the small hitting is included is taken as the second benefit expected value. In addition, the expectation value of the benefit granted when winning in the normal time is the normal benefit expectation value, and the expected value of the benefit granted in the high frequency support mode when the winning is achieved is the high expectation value bonus expected value I assume.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, pachinko machines (hereinafter, also referred to as “conventional pachinko machines”) provided with a sorting mechanism that distributes game balls to a first starting opening and a second starting opening exist. Conventionally, in a normal state (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode) at the beginning of playing a game, a pachinko machine distributes game balls to reach the distribution mechanism, and the first starting opening and the second starting opening Insert the game ball into the mouth alternately. And when it shifts to the high frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (the ordinary motorized role thing) operates with high frequency, entering the game ball in the 2nd starting opening with high probability without passing through the distribution means Let

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when trying to increase the high-sappoon bonus expectation value higher than the normal-time bonus expecting value and to increase the difference thereof, it is inevitably necessary to increase the second high-sappoon bonus expectation value. It is necessary to increase the benefit expectation value, but when the second benefit expectation value is increased, the benefit expectation value for normal times also increases (in the normal state, the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening and the second starting opening) Because the ball is hit and a lottery is executed). In addition, even if the first benefit expectation value is reduced, since the normal benefit expectation value is the average of the first benefit expectation value and the second benefit expectation value, the effect of reducing the first benefit expectation value is It becomes smaller.

  Furthermore, when regulation is provided to the size of the privilege which can be granted per unit time, if the bonus expectation value for the normal time is relatively large, in order to adjust within the range of the regulation, the bonus expectation value for high support is adjusted. Needs to be smaller. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the normal benefit expectation value and the high-sapple benefit benefit value. In other words, among the gaming states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profit obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. As a result, the player's sense of expectation in the case of transitioning from the normal state (the normal gaming state, the state with the smallest expected bonus value) to the high frequency support mode (the best gaming state, the largest state with the expected bonus value) It can not be caused.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment distributes the gaming ball to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in the normal state, but since the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33a only with high probability, By setting the first benefit expectation value low, the normal benefit expectation value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball enters only the second starting opening 34 with high probability when the player performs a right strike, so the second benefit expectation value should be set high. By this, it is possible to increase the high-sappo-time benefit expectation value in the frequent support B. That is, among the gaming states excluding the open / close execution mode, a large swing can be provided to the profit obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the gaming balls are distributed to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the gaming balls are alternately entered into the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 34, Expected value during high support period (high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between normal result expectation value and high support period benefit expectation value (high frequency support mode B), and normal status → high frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game such as mode A → high frequency support mode B, while the value of the privilege expectation value to be granted is gradually increased, and in the gaming state excluding the open / close execution mode, the normal Between the gaming state and the best gaming state, a large swing can be provided to the profit obtained by the player.

  Furthermore, in the case where there is a restriction on the size of the benefit that can be granted per unit time, the size of the benefit that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be set by setting the first benefit expectation value low. Adjustment is possible, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first benefit expectation value and the second benefit expectation value is increased. That is, among the gaming states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is possible to give per unit time while securing a large swing in the difference in profit obtained by the player between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of the special benefits within the limits of regulation.

  In addition, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects exerted by the features are compared with those of a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) having a sorting mechanism that distributes game balls to the first starting opening and the second starting opening. Although explained, the effect is not effective only for the conventional pachinko machine exemplified above, but for a pachinko machine provided with two or more ball entry parts that trigger different types of lottery to be executed. The effect is achieved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the through gate 35a at which passage of gaming balls triggers execution of the electronic combination opening lottery is disposed in one path (right flow path R2) distributed by the distribution mechanism 120. Thus, the player can be made to pay attention to the manner in which the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls (the order of distributing the game balls to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2), and a sense of expectation can be given. Furthermore, when it is distributed to the right side flow path R2, a feeling of expectation as to whether or not a winning combination is won can be given. Therefore, at least two stages of expectation are given to the distribution mode of the game balls in the distribution mechanism 120 and the lottery result in the electronic combination open lottery (that is, whether or not the ordinary electric character 53 is opened or not). Can.

  The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a support mode in the low frequency support mode, and the winning probability of the electronic part release lottery is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, but the fluctuation time in the electronic part open lottery (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) and the ordinary Compared with the low frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode where the opening time of the motorized role 53 is the same as the low frequency support mode, the winning probability of the electronic part opening lottery is higher, and the fluctuation time in the electronic part opening lottery (normal symbol As shown in the above-mentioned game flow, it is possible to execute the high frequency support mode B, which has a short fluctuation time) and a long open time of the ordinary electric character 53, and switching between these three support modes. In addition, various new game flows can be created.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has the following effects.
First, it defines as follows.
・ When the lottery time for the electric part opening lottery in high frequency support mode A (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is Tp and the electric part opening lottery is won, the ordinary electric role thing 53 starts the game ball Tm, the time until the supportable state is reached (the time for the movable piece 53a to start projecting and the gaming ball to be able to flow through the upper surface) Tm, ordinary when the electronic combination opening lottery is won The opening time of the motorized prize 53 is Ts1, the time from the point when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35a to the arrival of the ordinary electromotive prize 53 is Tr1, and the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35a. The time until the second starting opening 34 is entered by the normal motorized symbol 53 opened from the time of reaching the point of time t is Tf1.
・ When the lottery time for the electric part opening lottery in high-frequency support mode B (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is Tp and the electric part opening lottery is won, the normal electric role thing 53 starts the game ball Tm, the time until the supportable state is reached (the time for the movable piece 53a to start projecting and the gaming ball to be able to flow through the upper surface) Tm, ordinary when the electronic combination opening lottery is won The opening time of the motorized prize 53 is Ts2, the time from the point when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35b to the arrival of the ordinary electromotive prize 53 is Tr2, and the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35b. The time until the second starting opening 34 enters the ball by the normal motorized symbol 53 opened from the time of reaching the point of time T is Tf2.
When it defines in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is comprised so that the following Formula (1)-Formula (3) may be satisfy | filled.
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr1 Formula (1)
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr2 equation (2)
Tr1 + Tf1 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts1 <Tr2 + Tf2 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts2 Formula (3)
In the present embodiment, specific values of the above parameters are Tp = 0.05 seconds, Tm = 0.1 seconds, Tr1 = 0.3 seconds, Tr2 = 0.3 seconds, Tf1 = 2 .0 seconds, Tf2 = 5.0 seconds, Ts1 = 3.0 seconds, Ts2 = 6.0 seconds, and the above formulas (1) to (3) are satisfied.

In such a configuration, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is circulated (left-handed) to pass through the through gate 35a, the guidance by the ordinary electric character 53 ( The game ball can be made to enter the second start opening 34 by the assistance), but if the game ball is circulated (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the game ball becomes the second start opening 34 The game ball can not be made to enter the second starting opening 34 because the ordinary electric game piece 53 is closed before entering the ball.
Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game ball which is advantageous for the player, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, the game is performed so as to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120). The distribution mode (left-handed) in which the balls are distributed becomes a distribution mode of the gaming balls which is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode (right-handed distribution) in which the game balls pass through the through gate 35b.

  On the other hand, in the case where the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, the game is distributed so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, and is distributed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In any case, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 by the guidance (auxiliary) by the normal motorized part 53. However, when circulating the through gate 35a so that the game ball passes, since the game ball passes through the distribution mechanism 120, among the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120, the game distributed to the right flow path R2 Only balls can pass through gate 35a. Therefore, the ball passes through the through gate 35a for the number of game balls reached to the distribution mechanism 120 when the game balls are circulated (left-handed) so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120 and enter the second starting opening 34 The ratio of the number of gaming balls to be played is the second passing through gate 35b with respect to the number of gaming balls reaching through gate 35b when the gaming ball is circulated (right-handed) so as to pass through gate 35b. It becomes lower than the ratio of the number of game balls entering the starting opening 34. Therefore, considering the distribution mode of the game ball which is advantageous for the player, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode (right-handed distribution) in which the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. This is a distribution mode of the game balls which is more advantageous for the player than a distribution mode (left strike) in which the game balls are circulated so as to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120).

  Here, in the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, the control during the game is different only in the opening time of the ordinary electric winning combination 53 in the case of winning the one electric combination opening lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is a game advantageous to the player only by switching between the two high frequency support modes in which the opening time of the ordinary electric actor 53 is different when the electric jack opening lottery is won. The distribution mode of the ball can be changed. Therefore, new game characteristics can be created, and furthermore, the player can actively participate in the change operation of the distribution mode of the game ball, and the interest of the game can be improved.

B7. Modification of Second Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In the modification described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as the above embodiment will be omitted.

B7-1. Modification 1:
In the second embodiment, since the normal motor combination 53 for guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 is disposed above the first starting opening 33 b, in the high-frequency support mode B, the normal rotation combination 53 is used. While the game ball is being guided to the second starting opening 34, the ordinary electric moving object 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is released from the ordinary electric moving object 53 and flows down and enters the first start opening 33b. There is a problem that you ball it. The modified example 1 shown below solves the said subject.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary motor-operated part 53, and the respective starting ports in the first modification. Further, FIG. 67 is also an explanatory view for explaining the low frequency support mode in the first modification. Note that, in FIG. 67, the normal motorized combination 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the second starting opening 34 in this example is disposed to the right of the first starting opening 33b in a front view on the gaming board 30. Further, the ordinary motor-operated part 53 includes two movable pieces, a left movable piece 53d and a right movable piece 53e. The left movable piece 53d is disposed on the distribution path of the gaming ball from the opening 124 to the first starting opening 33b. The left movable piece 53d is inclined such that the right side portion is positioned lower than the left side portion. The right movable piece 53e is disposed on the distribution path of the gaming ball having passed through the through gate 35b. The right movable piece 53e is inclined so that the left side portion is positioned lower than the right side portion.

  The contents of control of the other configurations and the winning probability of the electronic combination open lottery in each support mode, the fluctuation time in the electronic combination open lottery, the open time of the ordinary electric power combination product 53, and the like are the same as those in the above embodiment. Each support mode when such a configuration is adopted will be described below.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. While the low frequency support mode is being executed, the game balls entered into the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2 as in the above embodiment, and the left channel The game ball thrown to the road R1 enters the first start opening 33a (FIG. 67 (a)), and the game ball distributed to the right channel R2 enters the first start opening 33b (FIG. 67) (B).

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the first modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game balls are circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. While the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the gaming balls having entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left flow passage R1 and the right flow passage R2, as in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the game ball thrown to the left channel R1 enters the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 are guided (assisted) by the left movable piece 53d of the ordinary motorized role piece 53 being opened with high probability and the second starting opening Enter 34. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is induced (assisted) by the normal motorized role piece 53 in the open state and the second starting opening 34 The game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34, since the normal motor-operated prize 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the position.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode B in the first modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the right and pass the through gate 35b. During execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the gaming ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the ordinary motorized symbol 53 being opened with high probability as in the above embodiment. And enter the second starting opening 34.

  At this time, unlike the second embodiment, the portion (right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric jack 53 for guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting opening 33b. The game ball being induced by the normal motorized character 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B does not pass through the upper part of the first start opening 33b, since the second start opening is not disposed above It can reach to 34. As a result, even if the case where the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed while the ordinary electric symbol 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball released from the ordinary electric symbol 53 and flowed down Can be suppressed from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, considering the relative ratio of the number of game balls to the first starting opening 33 and the number of game balls to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modification example 1 can further increase the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the second starting opening 34 as compared with the above embodiment.

B7-2. Modification 2:
In the second embodiment, since the normal motor combination 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is disposed above the first starting opening 33 b, in the high frequency support mode A Is guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 34, the ordinary electric character 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is released from the ordinary electric character 53 and flows down the first starting hole There is a problem of entering the ball to 33b.

  Similarly, in the high-frequency support mode B, the ordinary electric actor 53 is closed at an unintended timing while the ordinary electric actor 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, and the gaming ball is There is a problem that the game ball released from the normal electric symbol 53 and flowing down enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 2 shown below solves the said subject.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary motor-operated part 53, and the respective starting ports in the second modification. Further, FIG. 70 is also an explanatory view for explaining the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

  The difference between the second modification and the first modification is that the second modification does not include the first starting opening 33 b included in the first modification. The other configuration is the same as that of the first modification.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in the modification 2. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a frequency support mode B.

  In the case of the second modification, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the high-frequency support mode A, the gaming ball distributed to the right flow path R2 by the distribution mechanism 120 is guided by the left movable piece 53d and the second start Enter the mouth 34. At this time, unlike the configuration of the first modification, the second modification does not include the first starting opening 33b, so that the ordinary electric actor 53 closes at an unintended timing while guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, Even in the case where the gaming ball is released from the ordinary motor-operated prize 53 and flows down, it is possible to avoid the gaming ball from entering the first starting opening 33b. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is induced (assisted) by the normal motorized role piece 53 in the open state and the second starting opening 34 The game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34, since the normal motor-operated prize 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the position.

  Further, unlike the second embodiment, since the first starting opening 33b is not provided, the portion of the ordinary electric jack 53 guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B (right side movable The gaming ball guided by the ordinary electric jack 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B without the piece 53e) being located above the first start-up hole 33b is of the first start-up hole 33b. The second start port 34 can be reached without passing through the upper part. As a result, even if the case where the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed while the ordinary electric symbol 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball released from the ordinary electric symbol 53 and flowed down Can be avoided from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, considering the relative ratio of the number of game balls to the first starting opening 33 and the number of game balls to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modification example In the second embodiment, the ball entering ratio of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 can be further increased as compared with the second embodiment.

B7-3. Modification 3:
In the second embodiment, since the normal motor combination 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is disposed above the first starting opening 33 b, in the high frequency support mode A Is guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 34, the ordinary electric character 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is released from the ordinary electric character 53 and flows down the first starting hole There is a problem of entering the ball to 33b.

  Similarly, in the high-frequency support mode B, the ordinary electric actor 53 is closed at an unintended timing while the ordinary electric actor 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, and the gaming ball is There is a problem that the game ball released from the normal electric symbol 53 and flowing down enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 2 shown below solves the said subject.

  Further, in the first and second modifications, since the ordinary electric character 53 has two parts, the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, the ordinary electric role with respect to the game area PA of the gaming board 30 There is a problem that it is necessary to secure a large (large) space for arranging the object 53. The modification 3 shown below solves the said subject.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary motor-operated part 53, and the respective starting ports in the third modification. FIG. 73 is also an explanatory view for explaining the low frequency support mode in the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification does not have the first starting opening 33b as in the second modification. Further, the second starting opening 34 is disposed on the flow path through which the gaming balls discharged from the opening 124 flow. Further, the ordinary electric symbol 53 is disposed on the distribution path of the gaming ball from the opening 124 to the second starting opening 34. The operation of the ordinary motor-operated part 53 in this modification is different from that of the above embodiment. The opening / closing operation of the normal motorized symbol 53 in the third modification is performed by moving the movable piece 53 a disposed so as to protrude from the game board 30 on the plane of the game board 30. FIG. 73 shows the state of the low frequency support mode, and the ordinary motor-operated part 53 shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b) is in the closed state.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. As shown in FIG. 73 (a) and FIG. 73 (b), during execution of the low frequency support mode, the gaming balls having entered the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120 are the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. The game balls distributed to the left channel R1 enter the first starting opening 33a and the game balls allocated to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 and are then closed. The upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the ordinary electric symbol 53 in the state is made to flow downward, and the second starting port 34 is further drawn downward from the ordinary electric symbol 53 without entering the ball.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the third modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game balls are circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the gaming balls having entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. FIG. 74 (a) shows that the game ball thrown to the left channel R1 enters the first starting opening 33a. FIG. 74 (b) shows that the gaming balls distributed to the right side flow passage R2 enter the second starting opening 34. FIG. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the ordinary motorized prize 53 in this example moves from the closed state to the open state by moving the game board 30 in the upper right direction from the front view. When the ordinary motor-operated symbol 53 moves in the upper right direction, the gaming ball can be distributed from the opening 124 to the second starting opening 34, and the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34. In addition, since the ordinary electric symbol 53 in the embodiment and the modification guides the gaming ball which has reached the upper surface of the ordinary electric symbol 53 to the second start opening 34, the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 Although it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the ball, the ordinary electric character 53 in this example also makes it easy for the gaming ball released from the opening 124 to enter the second starting opening 34 by shifting to the open state. Functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34.

  Further, in the present modification, even if the player hits the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the gaming ball is induced (assisted) by the open-state ordinary electric role 53, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34, since the normal motor-operated prize 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the position.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode B in the third modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the right and pass the through gate 35b. As shown in the figure, the game ball having passed through gate 35b reaches the upper surface of wall W provided in game board 30, passes through the upper surface of wall W, and then the upper surface of ordinary motorized jack 53 being opened. And enter the second starting opening 34.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification does not include the first starting opening 33b as in the second modification, the open state at the timing at which the ordinary electric vehicle 53 is not intended in the high frequency support mode A It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 33b even when the state is shifted to the closed state.

  In addition, since the first starting opening 33b is not provided, the normal motorized jack 53 for guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B may be located above the first starting opening 33b. Instead, the gaming ball being induced by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B can reach the second starting opening 34 without passing through the upper part of the first starting opening 33 b. As a result, even if the case where the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed while the ordinary electric symbol 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball released from the ordinary electric symbol 53 and flowed down Can be avoided from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, considering the relative ratio of the number of game balls to the first starting opening 33 and the number of game balls to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modification example In the third embodiment, the ball entering ratio of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 can be further increased compared to the second embodiment.

  Furthermore, unlike the first and second modifications described above, the normal motorized part 53 in the third modification does not have two parts, such as the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, and is configured by one movable piece. . Therefore, the space for disposing the normal motorized symbol 53 can be narrowed (small) with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30, and space saving of the region where the ordinary motorized symbol 53 is disposed can be realized.

  Further, in the closed state, the normal motorized part 53 in the third modification shields the flow path from the right side flow path R2 to the second start port 34, and the flow from the wall W to the second start port 34. Break the route. Then, in the open state, the blocking of the flow channel from the right side flow passage R2 to the second start port 34 is released, and the flow channel from the wall W to the second start port 34 is formed. Therefore, the normal motorized product 53 can change the two flow paths by shifting from the closed state to the open state. That is, the normal motorized prize 53 can simultaneously change the states of the two types of distribution channels in one state change. As a result, even in the case where the gaming ball is distributed in the distribution channel from the right side flow passage R2 to the second starting opening 34, and in the case where the gaming ball is distributed in the distribution channel from the wall W to the second starting opening 34, either Also in the case, it is possible to execute a game using the ordinary electric character 53.

B7-4. Modification 4:
In the second embodiment, since the normal motor combination 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is disposed above the first starting opening 33 b, in the high frequency support mode A Is guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 34, the ordinary electric character 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is released from the ordinary electric character 53 and flows down the first starting hole There is a problem of entering the ball to 33b.

  Similarly, in the high-frequency support mode B, the ordinary electric actor 53 is closed at an unintended timing while the ordinary electric actor 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, and the gaming ball is There is a problem that the game ball released from the normal electric symbol 53 and flowing down enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 2 shown below solves the said subject.

  Further, in the configurations of the second modification and the third modification, the gaming balls distributed to the right flow passage R2 and discharged from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode enter the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It was the composition which flows down as it is without a ball. As a result, there is a problem that the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out is low regardless of the movement of the prize to the number of all the prize balls to be paid out in a series of games. The modification 4 shown below solves the above-mentioned subject.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary motor-operated part 53, and the respective starting ports in the fourth modification. Further, FIG. 76 is also an explanatory view for explaining the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification, the general winning hole 32 is disposed on the distribution channel on which the gaming balls discharged from the opening 124 flow. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification does not have the first start port 33b.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the low frequency support mode, the gaming ball entered from the opening 122 and distributed to the left flow passage R1 by the sorting mechanism 120 enters the first starting opening 33a. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the general winning opening 32. In the configurations of the second modification and the third modification, the game balls distributed to the right flow passage R2 and discharged from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode are allowed to enter the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 Although the game balls flowed down as they were, in this modification, the gaming balls distributed to the right flow path R2 in the low frequency support mode and discharged from the opening 124 enter the general winning opening 32. Therefore, compared with the above-mentioned second modification and third modification, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of winning balls to be paid out to the number of all winning balls to be paid out in a series of games regardless of the action of the bonus.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the fourth modification. As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the gaming balls distributed to the left flow passage R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting opening 33a. The gaming ball distributed to the right channel R2 enters the second starting opening 34. In the configuration of the fourth modification, even if the normal motorized role piece 53 is closed while the left movable piece 53 d guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball is in the general winning opening 32. It is possible to avoid entering the ball and entering the first starting opening 33b unintentionally. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is induced (assisted) by the normal motorized role piece 53 in the open state and the second starting opening 34 The game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34, since the normal motor-operated prize 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the position.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode B in the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 78, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the gaming ball which has passed through gate 35b has a high probability that the right side movable of the ordinary motorized prize 53 is open as in the first modification. It is guided (assisted) by the piece 53 e and enters the second starting port 34. In the configuration of the fourth modification, unlike the second embodiment, since the first starting opening 33b is not provided, the ordinary electric jack that guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B The gaming ball in which the 53 parts (right movable piece 53e) are not positioned above the first starting opening 33b and which is induced by the ordinary electric role 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is It can reach to the 2nd starting opening 34, without passing the upper part of the 1st starting opening 33b. As a result, even if the case where the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed while the ordinary electric symbol 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball released from the ordinary electric symbol 53 and flowed down Can be avoided from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, considering the relative ratio of the number of game balls to the first starting opening 33 and the number of game balls to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modification example In the second embodiment, the ball entering ratio of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 can be further increased as compared with the second embodiment.

B7-5. Modification 5:
In the second embodiment, since the first start opening 33 includes two, the first start opening 33a and the first start opening 33b, the detection of the ball entry of the gaming ball with respect to the first start opening 33 is It is necessary to do in the two ball entry parts of 1 starting opening 33a and the 1st starting opening 33b, there is a problem that it is necessary to have many sensors for entering detection of the game ball than before, the game area PA of the game board 30 On the other hand, there is a problem that the space for arranging the starting opening must be wider (larger) than the conventional one. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, since the normal motorized jack 53 for guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B is disposed above the first starting opening 33b, The game ball guided (or assisted) by the normal motorized symbol 53 in the high frequency support mode B passes through the upper part of the first start opening 33 b and reaches the second start opening 34. At this time, temporarily, if the normal motorized symbol 53 is closed while the normal motorized symbol 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball released from the normal motorized symbol 53 and flowed down, There is a problem that the ball is unintentionally entered into the first starting opening 33b. The modification 5 shown below solves the said subject.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary motor-operated part 53, and the respective starting ports in the fifth modification. Further, FIG. 79 is also an explanatory view for explaining the low frequency support mode in the fifth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the distribution mechanism 120 in the fifth modification, the left flow passage R1 has a semicircular shape. In addition, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 and released from the opening 123, and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 and released from the opening 124, can also be placed at positions where any game balls can enter. The starting opening 33a is arrange | positioned. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of the modification 5 is not equipped with the 1st starting opening 33b.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), during execution of the low frequency support mode, the gaming balls having entered the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120 are the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. After the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 enter the first starting opening 33a and the game balls allocated to the right channel R2 also flow out from the opening 124, 1 Enter the starting opening 33a.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the fifth modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game balls are circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the gaming balls having entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the game ball thrown to the left channel R1 enters the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 are guided (assisted) by the left movable piece 53d of the ordinary motorized role piece 53 being opened with high probability and the second starting opening Enter 34. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is induced (assisted) by the normal motorized role piece 53 in the open state and the second starting opening 34 The game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34, since the normal motor-operated prize 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the position.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode B in the fifth modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the right and pass the through gate 35b. During execution of the high frequency support mode B, the gaming ball that has passed through the through gate 35 b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53 e of the open ordinary electric power part 53 with high probability, and it is Hit the ball.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth modification includes only one of the first starting openings 33a as the first starting opening, a sensor for detecting ball entry of a game ball which must be provided as compared with the second embodiment. You can reduce the number of Also, along with that, it is possible to reduce the processing necessary for detecting the ball entering. Furthermore, the space which must be secured for arranging the starting opening relative to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller) than the second embodiment.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the portion (right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric jack 53 for guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting opening 33. The gaming ball being induced by the ordinary electric power part 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is not disposed above the (first start opening 33a). The second start port 34 can be reached without passing through. As a result, even if the case where the ordinary electric symbol 53 is closed while the ordinary electric symbol 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34, the gaming ball released from the ordinary electric symbol 53 and flowed down Can be suppressed from entering the first starting opening 33. Therefore, considering the relative ratio of the number of game balls to the first starting opening 33 and the number of game balls to the second starting opening 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modification example 5 can make the ball entering ratio of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 34 still higher compared with the above-mentioned embodiment.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, although the gaming balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, the gaming balls distributed to the left flow path R1 and the gaming balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are Since the player enters the first starting opening 33a, which is the same ball entering part, the player can make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the distribution mechanism 120, and can provide unexpectedness.

B7-6. Modification 6:
The distribution mechanism 120 in the second embodiment and the modification distributes the reached game balls alternately to the left flow passage R1 and the right flow passage R2, so that the player has reached the distribution mechanism 120. There is a problem that it is possible to estimate how to distribute, and the player's concentration on the game and the degree of attention may be reduced. The modification 6 shown below solves the said subject.

  FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary motor-operated part 53, and the respective starting ports in the sixth modification. Further, FIG. 82 is also an explanatory view for explaining the low frequency support mode in the sixth modification. Note that, in FIG. 82, the normal motorized combination 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the distribution mechanism 120 according to the sixth modification includes a clone 129 for temporarily retaining the gaming ball entered from the opening 122. An opening 123 and an opening 124 are formed in the crown 129. The through gate 35 a is provided in the opening 124.

  The game ball entered from the opening 122 is temporarily retained while moving in the area of the clown 129 and then released from the opening 123 or the opening 124. That is, the distribution mechanism 120 in the present modification randomly distributes the reached game balls into the opening 123 and the opening 124.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the game balls distributed to the opening 123 in the clone 129 enter the first starting opening 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the opening 124 in the clone 129 pass through the through gate 35a. The electronic combination open lottery is executed triggered by the passage, but since it is the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lottery is low, and the game balls distributed to the opening part 124 have a high probability to the first starting opening 33b. Hit the ball.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the sixth modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game balls are circulated so as to hit the left and make the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 enter the ball. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the gaming ball distributed to the opening 123 in the clone 129 enters the first starting opening 33a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the gaming balls distributed to the opening 124 in the clune 129 pass through the through gate 35a, and the electronic combination open lottery is executed triggered by the passage. Since the high-frequency support mode A is selected, the probability of winning the lottery is high, and in such a case, the normal electric jack 53 shifts to the open state. Therefore, the gaming ball distributed to the opening 124 by the clown 129 is guided (assisted) by the normal motorized role piece 53 and enters the second starting opening 34 with high probability. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is induced (assisted) by the normal motorized role piece 53 in the open state and the second starting opening 34 The game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34, since the normal motor-operated prize 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching the position.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode B in the sixth modification. As shown in FIG. 84, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the gaming ball which has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the ordinary motorized symbol 53 being opened with high probability. And enter the second starting opening 34.

  Thus, the modification 6 differs in the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 from the said embodiment and modification, and is provided with the clone 129. FIG. That is, the game balls having reached the distribution mechanism 120 are not randomly distributed to the two paths, but randomly distributed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to guess how the gaming balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120, and the player can be concentrated on the game. In the case of the high frequency support mode A, in particular, the gaming balls distributed to the opening 123 enter the first starting opening 33a, and the gaming balls allocated to the opening 124 have a high probability of the second starting opening 34. Enter the ball. Therefore, unlike the case where the sorting mechanism 120 alternates between the two paths, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entered into the first starting opening 33a and the number of game balls entered into the second starting opening 34 A bias may occur. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of the sixth modification, the high frequency support A can give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

  Further, in the present modification, a configuration in which the two openings of the opening 123 and the opening 124 are formed in the clune 129 is adopted, but a configuration in which three or more openings are formed in the clone 129 It may be adopted. For example, in addition to the opening 123 and the opening 124, the Kroon 129 may have a third opening. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the general winning opening 32 is provided on the distribution path of the gaming ball released from the third opening, or a configuration in which the ball entry portion is not provided. By doing this, it becomes more difficult for the player to further estimate how the gaming balls that have reached the sorting mechanism 120 are sorted. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120.

B7-7. Modification 7:
The pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment adopts a configuration in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode when the probability variation jackpot is won, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won next time, but in the high probability mode A configuration may be adopted in which the number of executions of the game play is limited. By adopting such a configuration, for example, even when the high probability support mode and the high frequency support mode B are entered when the 16R probability variation big hit B is won, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode Since there is a limit to the number of game times that can be executed in the state of B (for example, 150 times), when the jackpot is not won before reaching the limit number, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh modification is disadvantageous in the high probability mode state in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation of winning the jackpot and also failing to win the jackpot within the limited number of times. It is possible to give a sense of crisis that it will shift to a good state, and it is possible to give tonation to the player's sense of expectation.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above embodiment, among the jackpot types set in the distribution table for the first starting opening, when the jackpot type (probable variation jackpot A, normal jackpot A) to be the high frequency support mode A is won, the jackpot is A configuration may be adopted in which the player hardly recognizes that the player has won. For example, it is set such that the player does not easily recognize that the jackpot is won in the staging of the game play when the jackpot in the high frequency support mode A is won. Then, the period of the open / close execution mode after the end of the game round in which the jackpot was won is set to an extremely short period, and the player is set to a mode in which it is difficult to recognize that the open / close execution mode has been executed. Specifically, the number of round games (number of rounds) to be set to the jackpot type (probable variation jackpot A, normal jackpot A) to be the high frequency support mode A is reduced (for example, 2 rounds) and the round game Set the time very short. Furthermore, the effect in the open / close execution mode is also set to a mode that is hardly recognized by the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that the player has shifted to the high frequency support A after the jackpot is won from the low frequency support mode state. As a result, while the player is not aware, the game ball having reached the distribution mechanism 120 alternately enters the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b (in the low frequency support mode). The gaming ball having reached the minute mechanism 120 can shift to a state (high frequency support mode A) where balls are alternately entered into the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 34, giving the player unexpectedness As well as to improve the interest of the game.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the gaming ball that has passed through gate 35 (through gate 35a and through gate 35b) is not retained, but a configuration in which the passing gaming ball is retained may be adopted ( Maximum number of pending is 4). In this way, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball reaches the normal motorized symbol 53 through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) Whether the timing to do so or the timing at which the normal motorized symbol 53 becomes open is likely to deviate, and the timing is matched and induced to the ordinary motorized symbol 53 and the game ball reaches the second starting opening 34 While being able to make a player pay more attention to whether or not it is possible, a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency can be given.

B7-10. Modification 10:
The ordinary motor-operated part 53 is not limited to the configuration of the embodiment and the modification, and other configurations can be adopted. FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary motor-operated part 53. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the ordinary electric character 53 is in the closed state, the distribution surface 53s of the gaming ball in the plate-like movable piece 53a is in a state of falling down so as to be parallel to the plane of the gaming board 30. When the ordinary motorized role 53 is in the open state, the distribution surface 53s rotates so as to be substantially perpendicular to the plane of the game board 30, and the distribution ball 53 can be distributed through the distribution surface 53s. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effects as those of the embodiment and the modification can be obtained.

B7-11. Modification 11:
In the second embodiment, a non-motorized part may be provided instead of the ordinary motored part 53. Specifically, when the game ball passes through gate 35a or through gate 35b, the non-motorized part mechanically interlocked with through gate 35a and through gate 35b is opened for a predetermined time, and the predetermined time After the passage, it closes. By this, the processing can be simplified, and the same effect as that of the second embodiment can be obtained.

C. Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when game balls enter a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot by generating rights and a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, and a ball.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. About the invention group extracted from each above-mentioned embodiment etc .:
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the configuration is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
The feature group A is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and the modifications 1 to 6, 8 and 10 to 12 thereof.

[Feature A1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Rod-like members (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the circulation of gaming balls;
When viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side, viewed from the right side to the left side), the reference portion (the first part provided on the game board) is parallel to the rod-like member 1) a third lip 333, a fourth lip 334 at the entrance 33a of the starting opening 33, an upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633, a first mark 951, a second mark 952, a mark 1051);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  For example, a bar-like member such as a nail or the like that changes the distribution of gaming balls may be different in inclination from the size intended by the manufacturer, for example, due to an unintended external factor such as accidental impact during transport. . According to the feature A1, when the inclination degree of the reference portion is set in advance so as to coincide with the inclination degree of the rod-like member intended by the manufacturer, when viewed from the predetermined direction by relying on the reference portion The inclination of the rod-shaped member can be checked and corrected so that the rod-shaped member is parallel to the reference portion. For this reason, the inclination shift of the rod-shaped member can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the rod-shaped member and a dedicated adjustment tool.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A ball entry member (first starting opening 33) that forms a ball entry port (ball entry port 33a) where game balls can enter.
Equipped with
The rod-like member is a nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided above the entrance port member,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the reference portion is provided to the ball entry member.

  According to the feature A2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by using the reference portion provided in the ball entry member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to the feature A2,
The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the reference part is a lip (third lip 333, a fourth lip 334) of the ball entry port (the ball entry port 33a).

  According to the feature A3, since the inclination of the nail can be restored without separately providing a dedicated member as a reference portion to the ball entry member, the configuration of the gaming machine is prevented from being complicated. Can.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to the feature A2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reference portion is a mark (a first mark 951, a second mark 952, a mark 1051) attached to the ball entry member.

  According to the feature A4, the visibility of the reference portion can be easily enhanced, and the reliability of the repair can be enhanced.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 6, 8 and 10 to 12 thereof.

[Feature B1]
A gaming machine,
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the circulation of the gaming ball;
A defining means (a third edge 333, a fourth at the entrance 33a of the first start opening 33) defining an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, different from the nail Edge 334, the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633, the first mark 951, the second mark 952, the mark 1051),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may differ in inclination from the size intended by the manufacturer, for example, due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature B1, since the defining means defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, the angle defined by the defining means depends on the defining means. By checking and correcting the tilt of the nail, it is possible to correct the nail to the shipping tilt condition. Thus, the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
A ball entry member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming a ball entry port (ball entry port 33a) into which game balls can enter.
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the regulation means is provided to the ball entry member.

  According to the feature B2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by using the defining means provided in the ball entry member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B2,
A game machine characterized in that the defining means is a lip (third lip 333, a fourth lip 334) of the ball entry port (the ball entry port 33a).

  According to the feature B3, the inclination of the nail can be restored without separately providing a dedicated member as the defining means, so that the configuration of the gaming machine can be prevented from being complicated.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to feature B2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the defining means is a mark (a first mark 951, a second mark 952, a mark 1051) attached to the ball entry member.

  According to the feature B4, the visibility of the defining means can be easily enhanced, and the certainty of restoration can be enhanced.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth modification of the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the circulation of the gaming ball;
Angle information indicating means (first numerical information Na, second numerical information Nb) indicating information about an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may differ in inclination from the size intended by the manufacturer, for example, due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature C1, the angle information indicating means indicates information about the angle coincident with the degree of inclination of the nail intended by the manufacturer, and the angle information indicating means is used to confirm and correct the inclination of the nail. can do. Thus, the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
A ball entry member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming a ball entry port (ball entry port 33a) into which game balls can enter.
Equipped with
The gaming machine, wherein the angle information indicating means is provided in the ball entry member.

  According to the feature C2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by using the angle information display means provided in the ball entry member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C2,
As the nail, a first nail provided on one side of a predetermined direction, and a second nail provided on the other side of the predetermined direction;
Equipped with
The ball entry member is
It consists of at least a first part and a second part,
The first part is provided with first angle information indicating means indicating information of the angle of the first nail;
A game machine characterized in that the second part is provided with second angle information indicating means for indicating the information of the angle of the second nail.

  According to the feature C3, since the ball entry member is constituted by at least the first part and the second part, at the time of manufacture, the first part is provided with the first angle information display means, and the second part is It is possible to easily provide the second angle information indicating means. In particular, the first angle information indication means and the second angle information indication means have the same orientation so that both the first angle information indication means and the second angle information indication means can be viewed from one side. In the case of providing the angle information indicating means on the inner side of the ball entry member, it is difficult to provide the angle information indicating means on the inner side at the time of manufacture. Since the mouth member is constituted by the first part and the second part, manufacture is easy.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth modification of the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the circulation of the gaming ball;
A mark that defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board (the third edge 333, the fourth edge 334, and the upper surface 633S of the first start opening 633 at the entrance 33a of the first start opening 33) , The first mark 951, the second mark 952, the mark 1051),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may differ in inclination from the size intended by the manufacturer, for example, due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature D1, since the mark defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is checked and corrected so that the angle defined by the mark can be obtained by relying on the mark. This allows the nails to be re-set to the manufacturer's intentional inclination. Thus, the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to the feature D1,
The gaming machine, wherein the mark defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2, the inclination of the nail can be easily returned to the shipping state of the gaming machine.

[Feature D3]
A game machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein
A ball entry member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming a ball entry port (ball entry port 33a) into which game balls can enter.
Equipped with
The gaming machine, wherein the mark is provided on the ball entry member.

  According to the feature D3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by using the mark provided on the ball entry member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature D4]
A game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.
When viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side), the mark is parallel to the nail, and at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to recognize whether or not the inclination of the nail is the size intended by the manufacturer by confirming whether or not the nail is parallel to the mark when viewed from the predetermined direction. Moreover, when viewed from the predetermined direction, at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail, so that the mark has high visibility. Therefore, according to the feature D4, the inclination of the nail can be easily identified, and the deviation of the inclination of the nail can be repaired more easily.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from modifications 10 to 12 of the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the circulation of the gaming ball;
Ball entry port (opening 1400) where game ball can enter
Movable parts provided at the ball entry port and switchable between a closed state and an open state to change the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry port (movable pieces 1411a, 1411b, 1511a, 1511b, 1611a) Movable means (motor operated items 1410, 1510) comprising
A gaming machine comprising
The movable portion is
A game machine characterized by comprising predetermined portions (Sa, Sb, Ha, Hb, Ta) which define the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board.

  The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may differ in inclination from the size intended by the manufacturer, for example, due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature E1, since the predetermined part in the movable part defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is made to be the angle defined by the predetermined part, depending on the predetermined part. By checking and correcting, the nail can be corrected to the intended inclination of the manufacturer's intention. Thus, the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without the need for much experience in nail adjustment and a dedicated adjustment tool.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined part defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the game machine.

  According to the feature E2, the nail can be easily repaired to the inclination at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

[Feature E3]
A game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein
In the movable means, when the movable part is in a closed state, the predetermined part of the movable part defines the angle.

  According to the feature E3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired based on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the closed state so that the angle defined by the predetermined portion can be obtained.

[Feature E4]
A game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein
In the movable means, when the movable part is in the open state, the predetermined part of the movable part defines the angle.

  According to the feature E4, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired by relying on the predetermined part of the movable part in the open state. In particular, a nail close to the position of the movable part in the open state can be a target of repair, and the nail can be easily repaired.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh modification of the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
A reference portion (a first mark 1151 and a second mark 1152) provided on the gaming board that is guaranteed to be installed at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the gaming board;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine, accessories such as nails are installed on the gaming board. According to the feature D1, it is possible to confirm and correct the inclination of the accessory by relying on the reference part that is guaranteed to be at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board. For this reason, it is possible to easily and accurately repair the deviation of the tilt of the accessory without requiring much experience in adjusting the tilt of the accessory and a dedicated adjustment device.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the circulation of gaming balls
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the angle guaranteed by the reference portion is a right angle.

  According to the feature F2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected, relying on the reference part that is guaranteed to be installed perpendicularly to the surface of the game board. The nail is provided with the inclination intended by the manufacturer, but according to the feature D2, the inclination of the nail can be easily made by comparing the orientation of the nail with the reference part that is guaranteed to be installed vertically. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the inclination of the nail can be easily adjusted.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature G1]
First type ball entering means (first starting port in the second embodiment), wherein entering of the game ball triggers change of the first symbol;
Second type ball entering means (second starting port in the second embodiment), wherein entering the game ball triggers a change in the second symbol,
When the game ball is distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of ball entry into the first type ball entry means and the game ball into the second type ball entry means per unit time. Control means for controllably changing the relative entering ratio of the ball to the number of entering balls in at least three stages;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when the gaming balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of ball entry into the first kind ball entering means and the second kind ball entering means per unit time Since the relative ratio of the number of game balls to the number of balls entered is variably controlled in at least three stages, creating a new variety of game flows by combining the relative ratios of three stages of balls It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
Detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Auxiliary means (normally-powered handpiece 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball to the second type entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
Equipped with
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed into at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is at least two stages of a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time Changeable,
A first assistance time, which is a time during which the assistance means performs the assistance in response to the winning of the predetermined lottery, is a first assistance time and a second assistance time which is longer than the first assistance time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
As a control mode, it is possible to execute a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B),
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the first assistance time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the first assistance time.
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the second assistance time.
A game machine characterized by changing the relative pitch ratio by switching the control mode.

  According to the feature G2, since the control means changes the entering relative ratio by switching three control modes having different winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the assisting time, relatively simple control By this, it is possible to realize switching of the entering relative ratio.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature H1]
First type ball entering means (first starting port in the second embodiment), wherein entering of the game ball triggers change of the first symbol;
Second type ball entering means (the first starting opening in the second embodiment), in which game ball entry of a game ball is a trigger for variation of the second symbol,
Distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately distributing the reached game balls into a first path (left channel R1) and a second channel (right channel R2);
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first detection position which is a predetermined position on the second path;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by the detection of passage of the game ball by the first detection means;
Auxiliary means (normally-powered handpiece 53) for guiding the reached game ball in a predetermined distribution direction when the predetermined lottery is won;
Equipped with
The first type ball entering means is disposed at a position where the game ball distributed to the first path can enter the ball,
The auxiliary means is disposed at a position where the game balls distributed to the two routes can reach.
A game machine characterized in that the second type ball entering means is disposed at a position where a game ball whose distribution direction is guided by the auxiliary means can enter the ball.

  According to the feature H1, of the game balls having reached the distribution means, the game balls distributed to the first path enter the first type ball-in means, and are distributed to the second path. The game ball assisted by the auxiliary means enters the second type ball entering means. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed in the distribution mode to reach the distribution means, the frequency of entering the game balls to the first type ball entering means can be predetermined by changing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. It is possible to change the entering frequency of the game ball to the second type ball entry means while keeping constant within the range.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passing through a second detection position which is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position;
The lottery execution unit executes the predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by the second detection unit detecting the passage of the game ball.
The auxiliary means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball having passed through the second detection position is disposed at a reachable position.

  According to the feature H2, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position, only the second kind ball entering means is played You can enter a ball. Therefore, it is possible to change the frequency of ball entry into the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means by changing the distribution mode.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature I1]
The first ball entering means (the first starting opening 33a in the second embodiment), in which the game ball enters the ball as a trigger for symbol fluctuation;
The second ball entering means (the first starting opening 33b in the second embodiment), in which the game ball enters the ball as a trigger for symbol fluctuation;
A sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting the reached game balls into a plurality of routes,
A first guide route (left channel R1) for guiding the distributed game balls to the first ball entry means;
A second guide route (right channel R2) for guiding the distributed game balls to the second ball entry means;
Equipped with
The symbol changing with the entrance of the game ball to the first ball entry means is the same as the symbol changing with the entrance of the game ball to the second ball entry means. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I1, even though the game ball is distributed by the distribution means, even if the distributed game ball enters the first ball entry means, it enters the second ball entry means Even in the case of a ball, since the same symbol is changed in any case, it is possible to give a surprisingness to a player who has predicted that a different symbol changes for each ball entry means, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature I2]
It is a game machine according to feature I1,
First symbol changing means for changing a first symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means;
The third ball entry means (the second starting opening 34), where entering the game ball triggers a change in the symbol,
Second symbol variation means for varying a second symbol, which is a symbol different from the first symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the third entry means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I2, since the ball entry of the gaming ball is provided with the third ball entry means serving as a trigger for changing the second symbol, in addition to the sense of expectation for the variation of the first symbol for the player , Can be given a sense of expectation regarding the variation of the second symbol. Furthermore, with regard to the role of the distribution means, the player can be made to make various guesses, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to the feature I2,
Auxiliary means arranged on a route along which game balls circulate from the sorting means to the second ball entering means, and assisting the game balls flowing on the route into the third ball entering means A gaming machine characterized by comprising (normally-powered electronic part 53).

  According to the feature I3, since the auxiliary means for assisting in entering the third ball entering means is provided on the path through which the gaming balls are distributed to the second ball entering means, the game balls distributed by the distributing means However, even if the first guide route and the second guide route are distributed to any of the same symbol (the first symbol) will trigger the game ball distributed to the second guide route by the auxiliary means This may be a trigger for changing the second symbol, and the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol can be made different depending on the operation pattern of the auxiliary means.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to feature I3,
It has detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second guide route,
The auxiliary means is
The game ball circulating on the route from the distribution means to the second ball entering means enters the third ball entering means upon detection that the detection means has passed the game ball. A gaming machine characterized by supporting things.

  According to the feature I4, when the detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the auxiliary means is the third game ball distributed on the route through which the game ball flows from the distributing means to the second ball entering means. Since it assists the player to enter the ball, the player is urged to distribute the game ball in the second guide route, and when the game ball passes a predetermined position, the player feels an expectation for the player. Can be granted. Further, the player can be concentrated on the game by urging the player to distribute the game balls in the second guide route.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine according to the feature I4,
It has lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by the detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means,
The auxiliary means is
A game ball circulating on a route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means assists the ball entering the third ball entering means when winning the predetermined lottery. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature I5, when the detection means has won the predetermined lottery performed triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball, the auxiliary means runs on the path from the distribution means to the second ball entering means Since circulating game balls assist in entering the third ball entry means, by controlling the winning probability in a predetermined lottery, control the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol Can.

[Feature I6]
A game machine according to feature I4 or feature I5, wherein
In the case where the detection means for detecting passing through the predetermined position on the second guide route is a first detection means (through gate 35a),
A second detection means (through gate 35b) different from the first detection means for detecting passing through a specific position different from the position on the route distributed by the distribution means;
The auxiliary means is
When the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, it assists the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entering means A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I6, when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the assistance means enters the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means into the third ball entry means Since the ball is assisted, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the third ball entry means by passing through the second detection means without passing through the sorting means. As a result, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be made to enter the third ball entry means only with high probability.

[Feature I7]
The gaming machine according to feature I6,
The lottery execution means is
When the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed.
The auxiliary means is
A gaming machine characterized by assisting a game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entering means when the predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the feature I7, the auxiliary means detects the passage by the second detection means, when the second detection means has won the predetermined lottery which is triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball. Since the game ball is assisted to enter the third ball entry means, making the game ball enter the third ball entry means via the second detection means without passing through the sorting means Is possible. Therefore, when the game ball is circulated so that the player reaches the sorting means after lowering the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are played Since the ball enters the ball and the possibility of the game ball entering the third ball entry means is low, it is possible to change only the first symbol with high probability. In addition, when the game ball is circulated so that the player reaches the sorting means after increasing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means, and The game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the first symbol and the second symbol can be varied. Furthermore, the game ball reaches the sorting means when the player distributes the game ball so that the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball after increasing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. The probability is low, and since the gaming ball has a high probability of entering the third ball entry means via the second detection means and the auxiliary means, it is possible to change only the second symbol with high probability. Therefore, at least three states of the gaming state in which only the first symbol fluctuates with high probability, the gaming state in which the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate, and the gaming state in which only the second symbol fluctuates with high probability Can create As a result, new game play can be created by variously combining three game states in which the changing proportions of the two symbols are different.

[Feature I8]
The gaming machine according to feature I6,
It comprises control means for controlling the gaming machine,
The control means can execute a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B). ,
In the first control mode,
It is impossible or difficult for the gaming ball whose passage has been detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means,
It is impossible or difficult for gaming balls whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means,
In the second control mode,
It is possible or easy for the gaming ball whose passage has been detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means,
It is impossible or difficult for gaming balls whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means,
In the third control mode,
It is possible or easy for the gaming ball whose passage has been detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means,
It is possible or easy for a game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means.

  According to the feature I8, since the control means can execute three control modes having different difficulty levels (hardness / easiness) of entering the game ball into the third entering means, the control mode Switching can be used to create new various game flows.

[Feature I9]
It is a game machine according to feature I8,
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed into at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time (the fluctuation time of the electronic combination open lottery) from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result is a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time Can be changed to at least two stages with time,
A first assistance time, which is a time during which the assistance means performs the assistance in response to the winning of the predetermined lottery, is a first assistance time and a second assistance time which is longer than the first assistance time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the first assistance time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the first assistance time.
The third control mode is
A gaming machine, wherein the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

  According to the feature I9, the degree of difficulty in entering the game ball into the third entering means (difficultity / easiness) by controlling the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the assisting time Since three different control modes can be executed, it is possible to realize creation of new various game flows using switching of the control mode by relatively easy control.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A predetermined ball entry means (the second start opening 34 in the second embodiment) capable of entering the game ball;
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a specific position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Auxiliary means (normally-powered electronic article 53) for assisting the entry of gaming balls into the entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
A sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting the reached game balls into a plurality of routes,
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection means is disposed on one of the plurality of paths (the right flow path R2).

  According to the feature J1, the sorting means detects the passage of the gaming ball as a trigger for executing the predetermined drawing of whether or not the assisting means assists the game ball entering the ball entering means. Since it is disposed on one of the plurality of routes to be distributed, the player can be made to pay attention to the mode of distribution of the game balls by the distribution means.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to the feature J1,
The first ball entering means (the first starting opening 33b) is disposed at a position where the game balls distributed to the one path by the distributing means can be thrown in when the assistance means does not assist. Equipped
The ball entering means into which the gaming ball enters when assisted by the auxiliary means is a second ball entering means (second starting opening 34) different from the first ball entering means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J2, since the game ball distributed to one path by the distribution means is not assisted by the auxiliary means, the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where it can enter the ball, In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation about the mode of sorting the gaming balls by the sorting means, if the gaming ball is sorted to one route, does the gaming ball enter the first ball entry means, or With the assistance of the auxiliary means, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player enters the second ball entry means, and at least two steps are given to the return of the game ball that has reached the distribution means. be able to.

[Feature J3]
A game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein
Third ball entering means (first starting opening 33a) disposed at a position where the game balls distributed to the path (left channel R1) different from the one path by the distributing means can enter;
First symbol variation means for changing a first symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means;
Second symbol variation means for varying a second symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J3, although the gaming ball is distributed by the distribution means, even if the distributed gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, the ball is entered into the third ball entry means Also in the case where it is, since it changes the first symbol which is the same symbol in either case, it is general that the different symbol changes with the entrance of the game ball as a trigger for every ball entering means of the destination distributed by the distributing means. The unexpectedness can be given to the player who has assumed that the game machine has the above configuration, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature K group>
[Feature K1]
A first sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for alternately distributing the reached game balls into a first path (left channel R1 in the second embodiment) and a second channel (right channel R2);
Second distributing means (commonly used electric symbol 53) for distributing game balls circulating in the second path into a third path and a fourth path;
A first type ball entry means (first start opening), in which entry of the game ball is a trigger for fluctuation of the first symbol,
Second type ball entry means (second starting opening), where entering the game ball triggers a change in the second symbol,
Equipped with
The first type ball entering means is disposed at a position where game balls distributed through the first path and the third path can enter the ball,
The second type ball entering means is disposed at a position where the game ball having circulated the fourth path can enter the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the second distribution means changeably controls the probability of distributing a game ball to the fourth path.

  According to the feature K1, since the probability that the second sorting means distributes the gaming balls to the fourth path can be changed, the game having the first sorting means has arrived. Even in the case where balls are alternately distributed to the first path and the second path, the first symbol and the first symbol can be changed by changing the probability that the second distributing means distributes the game balls to the fourth path. The changing ratio with the second symbol can be changed. For example, when the second distribution means sets the probability of distributing game balls to the fourth path low, the game ball distributed to the first path by the first distribution means is classified into the first kind ball collecting means Enter the ball and change the first symbol. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second path can be distributed to the third path with high probability by the second distribution means and entered into the first type ball-in-place means, and the first symbol can be varied . That is, it is possible to cause the game balls that have reached the first sorting means to enter the first type ball entering means with high probability, and to change the first symbol. In addition, when the second sorting means sets the probability of sorting the game ball to the fourth path high, the first sort means sorting balls to the first path by the first sorting means Enter the ball and change the first symbol. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second path can be distributed to the fourth path with high probability by the second distribution means and entered into the second type ball-in means, and the second symbol can be varied . Thus, the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed by changing the probability that the second distributing means distributes the game balls to the fourth path.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The second sorting means (normally driven combination 53) passes the first sorting means in a mode (opened state) in which gaming balls flowing through the second path are sorted to the fourth path. A game machine characterized by comprising guide means for guiding a game ball circulating without being sent to the second type ball entering means.

  According to the feature K2, in the aspect in which the game balls circulating the second route are distributed to the fourth route, a guide for guiding the game balls circulating without passing through the first sorting means to the second kind ball entering means Means are provided. Therefore, by distributing the game ball in the distribution mode in which the second distribution means, which is the mode for distributing to the fourth route, is reached without passing through the first distribution means, the game ball receives the second kind ball It is possible to increase the probability of entering the means, and it is possible to increase the ratio at which the second symbol fluctuates as the ratio at which the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate.

[Feature K3]
A game machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, wherein
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the gaming ball has passed a predetermined position on the second path;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The second sorting means determines, based on the result of the predetermined lottery, to which one of the third and fourth paths the game ball circulating the second path should be distributed. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature K3, the second sorting means decides, based on the result of the predetermined lottery, to which of the third and fourth paths the game ball circulating the second path is to be distributed Since the determination is made, the player can not recognize in advance which one of the third and fourth paths the game balls circulating the second path are assigned. Therefore, the game player is made to guess as to the result of the predetermined lottery and to which of the third and fourth paths the game ball circulating the second path is to be distributed, and a sense of expectation Can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature L group>
[Feature L1]
A first ball entry means (a second start opening 34 in the second embodiment) capable of entering the game ball;
Detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Auxiliary means (normally-powered handpiece 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball to the first entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
Control means for controlling the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed into at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time (the fluctuation time of the electronic combination open lottery) from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result is a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time Can be changed to at least two stages with time,
A first assistance time, which is a time during which the assistance means performs the assistance in response to the winning of the predetermined lottery, is a first assistance time and a second assistance time which is longer than the first assistance time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
As a control mode, it is possible to execute a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B),
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the first assistance time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the assistance time is the first assistance time.
The third control mode is
A gaming machine, wherein the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

  According to the feature L1, since the control means can switch three control modes having different winning probability of the predetermined lottery, lottery execution time, and auxiliary time, it is possible to newly switch using the switching of the control mode. Various game flows can be created.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means (first start port) different from the first ball entering means;
First distributing means for alternately distributing the reached game balls into a first path (left channel R1) and a second channel (right channel R2);
Equipped with
The second ball entering means is disposed at a position where game balls distributed through the first path and the second path can enter the ball,
The detection means detects that the game ball has passed the predetermined position on the second path,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the auxiliary means is disposed on a path along which the game ball circulates from the second path to the ball entering means.

  According to the feature L2, although the sorting means alternately distributes the game ball to the first path and the second path, the second ball entering means is configured to set the first path and the second path. Since the distributed game balls are arranged at the positions where the balls can be entered, it is possible to give the player various guesses as to the purpose of installing the sorting means, and to provide unexpectedness. In addition, because the assistance means assists the game ball distributed to the second path to enter the first ball entry means, the game sphere allocated to the second path by the distribution means is assisted by the assistance means While being able to make a player pay attention to whether or not to be assisted, a feeling of expectation can be given.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Ball entry means (the second starting opening 34 in the second embodiment) capable of entering the game ball;
A sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting the reached game balls into a plurality of routes,
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting passing through a first detection position which is a position on one of the plurality of paths;
Second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passing through a second detection position different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery),
Auxiliary means (normally-powered electric symbol 53) for assisting the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entry means;
Equipped with
The lottery execution means is
The predetermined lottery is executed when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball,
When the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed.
A lottery mode in which the lottery execution time from the time when the first detection means or the second detection means detects the passage of the gaming ball to the time when the predetermined lottery is started and the lottery result is output is Tp Equipped
The auxiliary means is
Assists the game ball having passed the first detection position to enter the ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won,
Assists the game ball having passed the second detection position to enter the ball entry means when the player has won the predetermined lottery,
The time from the time when the lottery result is output to the time when the assisting means becomes the assistable state when winning the predetermined lottery is Tm,
In the case of performing the assistance in response to the winning of one predetermined lottery, an assistance mode in which the assistance time which is the assistance time is the first assistance time Ts1, and the assistance time the first assistance time And an auxiliary mode which is a second auxiliary time Ts2 longer than Ts1.
The time from when the gaming ball passes the first detection position to when it reaches the auxiliary means Tr1, and the time from when the gaming ball passes the second detection position to when it reaches the auxiliary means And Tr2,
The time from the point when the game ball which has passed the first detection position has reached the auxiliary means to the time the ball enters the ball entering means by the aid of the auxiliary means is Tf1 and the game ball which has passed the second detection position is In the case where the time from when the auxiliary means is reached to when the ball enters the ball by the aid of the auxiliary means is Tf2,
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr1
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr2
Tr1 + Tf1 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts1 <Tr2 + Tf2 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts2
A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature M1, the assisting means includes an assisting mode in which the assisting time is the first assisting time Ts1, and an assisting mode in which the assisting time is the second assistance time Ts2. In the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, when the game ball is circulated to pass the first detection position, that is, the game ball is circulated to reach the distribution means. In this case, the game ball can be made to enter the ball by means of assistance by the auxiliary means, but if it is distributed so that the game ball passes through the second detection position, the game ball becomes the means to enter the ball Since the assistance by the auxiliary means ends before entering the ball, it is impossible to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, in consideration of the distribution mode of the gaming ball which is advantageous for the player, the first detection position is passed (the distribution means is reached As described above, the distribution mode in which the gaming balls are distributed becomes a distribution mode of the gaming balls which is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode in which the second detection position is circulated such that the gaming balls pass.

  On the other hand, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, when the game ball is circulated such that the game ball passes the first detection position, and the game ball passes the second detection position In any of the cases where the game balls are distributed, it is possible to cause the game balls to enter the ball entering means with the aid of the auxiliary means. However, when distributing the first detection position so that the game ball passes through, the game ball passes through the distribution means, so among the game balls that have reached the distribution means, only the game ball distributed to one route It can not pass the first detection position. Therefore, the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering means through the first detection position with respect to the number of gaming balls having reached the sorting means when distributing the gaming balls to reach the sorting means Is the game ball entering the ball entering means by passing through the second detection position with respect to the number of game balls having reached the second detection position when circulating the game ball to pass the second detection position Lower than the percentage of the number. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game ball advantageous to the player, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, the distribution mode in which the game ball is distributed so as to pass the second detection position. The distribution mode of the game ball is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode of distributing the game ball so as to pass the first detection position (to reach the distribution means).

  Therefore, by switching the auxiliary mode by the auxiliary means, it is possible to change the distribution mode of the game balls which is advantageous for the player in the distribution mode in which the game balls are caused to enter the ball by the auxiliary means. New game characteristics can be created, and furthermore, the player can actively participate in the change operation of the distribution mode of the game ball, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Distribution means (sorting mechanism 120) for alternately distributing the reached game balls into the first guide route (left channel R1 in the fifth modification of the second embodiment) and the second guide route (right channel R2) )When,
A ball entry portion (a first starting opening 33a in the fifth modification of the second embodiment) capable of entering a game ball;
Equipped with
A gaming machine, wherein the first guiding path and the second guiding path both guide the game ball to the same ball entry portion.

  According to the feature N1, although the game balls are distributed by the distribution means, the game balls distributed to the first guide route and the game balls allocated to the second guide route are the same. Since the player is guided to the ball entry portion of the player, it is possible to make the player make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the sorting means and to provide unexpectedness.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
When the ball entering portion guided by both the first guide route and the second guide route is the first ball entering portion, the ball is a ball entering portion capable of entering a game ball, and A second ball entry part (second start port 34) different from the ball entry part 1;
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first detection position which is a predetermined position on the second guide route;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball;
The auxiliary means (normal electric combination 53) disposed on the path along which the game ball circulates from the second guiding path to the first ball entry portion, and the winning is made in the predetermined lottery, Assisting means for assisting the game ball having reached the assisting means to enter the second ball entry portion;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N2, it is possible to cause a part of the game balls distributed to the second guide route to enter the second ball entry unit. Therefore, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the relative ratio of the number of game balls entered to the first ball entry to the number of game balls entered to the second bead is controlled. be able to.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to the feature N2,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passing through a second detection position which is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position;
The lottery execution unit executes the predetermined lottery in response to the second detection unit detecting the passage of the game ball.
The auxiliary means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball having passed through the second detection position is disposed at a reachable position.

  According to the feature N3, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass the second detection position without passing the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position, only the second ball entry portion plays the game You can enter a ball.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A distribution area in which gaming balls are distributed,
A distribution route changing unit (generally driven combination 53 in the third modification of the second embodiment) disposed in the distribution region and changing a distribution route through which the game ball can be distributed;
Equipped with
The distribution route changing means is
In the first state (closed state), the first distribution path (the path from the right side flow path R2 to the second start opening 34) through which gaming balls can be distributed is shielded, and the gaming balls can be distributed first Divide the two flow paths (the path from the wall W to the second start port 34),
In the second state (open state), the shielding of the first distribution channel is released, and the second distribution channel is formed.

  According to the feature O1, the distribution route changing means can change the two distribution routes by shifting from the first state to the second state. That is, the distribution route changing means can simultaneously change the states of the two types of distribution routes in one state change. As a result, it is possible to carry out a game using the distribution route changing means in either of the cases where the game balls are distributed in the first distribution channel and also in the case where the game balls are distributed in the second distribution channel. .

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
It has lottery execution means to execute a predetermined lottery (electronic combination release lottery),
The distribution route changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by transitioning from the first state to the second state when the predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the feature O2, since the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state when the player has won the predetermined lottery, the player is given an expectation of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. can do. In addition, by controlling the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the probability and the frequency of changing the first distribution channel and the second distribution channel.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to the feature O2,
First detection means (through gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first position on the first flow path upstream of the flow path changing means with respect to the flow direction of the game ball than the flow path change means 35a),
Second detection means (through gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed a second position on the second flow path upstream of the flow path changing means with respect to the flow direction of the game ball than the flow path change means And 35b),
The lottery execution means is
The predetermined lottery is executed when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball,
A game machine characterized by executing the predetermined lottery when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball.

  According to the feature O3, since the predetermined lottery is executed when the gaming ball passes the first position or the second position, various game characteristics can be created by using the property. For example, according to the state of the game, it is controlled that the one where the game ball is made to pass the first position becomes advantageous for the player, and the one where the game ball is made to pass the second position is the player By controlling to be advantageous for the player, it is possible to make the player have a playability that promotes the change of the distribution mode of the game balls and to actively participate in the game.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to feature O3,
The distribution route changing means is
The game ball which has passed the first position when the player has won the predetermined lottery, and the game ball which has triggered the win is the first distribution in which the shielding is canceled by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning from the first state to the second state at a timing at which a path can be circulated.

  According to the feature O4, the game ball is allowed to pass through the first position and a predetermined lottery is won, and the distribution route changing means is shifted from the first state to the second state and the shielding of the first distribution route is released. It is possible to suppress an event that the gaming ball can not be distributed to the first distribution channel during the period in which the shielding is canceled despite the fact that the player's sense of expectation is reduced.

[Feature O5]
A game machine according to the feature O3 or the feature O4, wherein
The distribution route changing means is
The game ball which has passed the second position when the player has won the predetermined lottery, and the game ball which is the trigger of the win is the second distribution route formed by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning from the first state to the second state at a timing at which circulation is possible.

  According to the feature O5, the game ball is allowed to pass through the second position, and a predetermined lottery is won, and the distribution route changing means is shifted from the first state to the second state to form the second distribution route. Regardless, it is possible to suppress an event that the gaming ball can not be distributed to the second distribution channel during the period in which the second distribution channel is formed, and the expectation of the player is reduced.

[Feature O6]
The gaming machine according to the features O1 to O5,
It is disposed at a specific position of the distribution area, and includes a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball.
The specific position is
It is a position on the first distribution route downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the gaming ball, and on the second distribution route from the distribution route changing means A gaming machine characterized in that it is a downstream position with respect to the distribution direction of the gaming balls.

  According to the feature O6, it is a position on the first distribution route downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the gaming ball, and is on the second distribution route and the distribution route is changed Since the ball entering means is provided at a position downstream of the game ball in the distribution direction of the gaming ball, the game ball entering means may be changed to the second state when the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state. Is highly likely to enter the ball, which can increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature P1]
The first type ball entering means (the first starting opening 33b in the second embodiment), in which the game ball enters the ball as a trigger for the fluctuation of the first symbol,
A second type ball entry means (second starting opening 34), which causes the game ball to enter a second symbol different from the first symbol.
It is a sorting means (normally operated combination 53) for sorting the reached game balls, and when it does not operate, the game balls circulating a predetermined position are caused to enter the first type ball entering means and operated. And sorting means for causing the game ball distributed in the predetermined position to enter the second type ball entering means,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature P1, the game ball arriving at the sorting means is distributed according to whether or not the sorting means is operated, the ball entering means for entering the ball is different, and the changing symbol is different. It can be noticed whether or not the distributing means operates.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to the feature P1,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a specific position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electronic combination open lottery) triggered by detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the sorting means operates when the predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the feature P2, since the sorting means operates when a predetermined lottery is won, it is possible to control the frequency at which the sorting means operates by controlling the winning probability in the predetermined lottery As a result, it is possible to control the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to the feature P2,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific position is a position where the game ball having passed the specific position can reach the distribution means.

  According to the feature P3, since the specific position is a position where the gaming ball having passed the specific position can reach the distributing means, the specific position is made specific to the player having an expectation of the operation of the distributing means. It can also be made to notice whether the game ball passes the position. Therefore, it is possible to make it pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes a specific position, and to make it pay attention to how the game ball which has passed the specific position is distributed by the distribution means, and the game ball is distributed It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages with respect to the mode to

  In addition, invention of the said characteristic A group-the characteristic P group solves the following subjects.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various structures, controls, effects, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detection and deterrence of illegal actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, providing a more healthy game, etc. It is rare.

  In addition, you may employ | adopt the structure which combined suitably 1 or several structure contained in the said feature A group-the feature P group. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied or applied to each feature will be shown below.

  Pachinko game machine: Launching means for launching game balls toward the game area based on the player's shooting operation, and starting ball entry provided in the game area and capable of entering the game balls flowing down the game area A game comprising: a unit; an information acquisition unit for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball storage unit; and an acquired information storage unit for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit Machine.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, start means for starting variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of start operation means, and operation of stop operation means A gaming machine, comprising: stopping means for stopping variable display of the plurality of patterns due to the passage of time or for the passage of a predetermined time; and privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege according to the symbols after the stopping.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modifications, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in the respective forms described in the section of the summary of the invention, and the technical features in the modified examples are for solving some or all of the problems described above, or Replacements or combinations can be made as appropriate to achieve part or all of the effects. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in the present specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine main body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window portion 19: Glass unit 20: Upper plate 21: Lower plate 22: Discharge port 23: Lever 24: Directional operation button 25: Operation handle 30: Game board 31 ... induction rail 31a ... inner rail section 31b ... outer rail section 32 ... general ball entry port 33 ... first starting port 34 ... second starting port 34a ... Electric combination 34b: Electric combination drive 35: Through gate 36: Variable winning device 36a: Large winning opening 36b: Opening and closing door 36c: Variable prize driving 37 Special drawing unit 37a ... 1st symbol display part 37b ... 2nd symbol display part 37c ... 1st holding display part 37d ... 2nd holding display part 38 ... common drawing unit 39 ... Round display unit 40 ... variable display unit 41 ... liquid crystal display unit 41a ... display surface 41 aL ... display area 41 aS ... display area 42 ... nail 43 ... out port 45 ... main display section 46 ... speaker 47 ... various lamps 51 .. . 1st control unit 52 2nd control unit 53 3rd control unit 54 tank 55 tank rail 56 case rail 60 main controller 61 main Control board 63a ... success or failure table storage area 63b ... distribution table storage area 63c ... reach determination table storage area 63d ... fluctuation time table storage area 63e ... stop result table storage area 63f. ... Command information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Pending information storage area 64c ... Electric power holding area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f ... First judgment Processing result storage area 67a ... various detection cells Sail 70: Dispensing control device 71: Dispensing device 80: Firing control device 81: Game ball emitting mechanism 85: Power supply device 86: Power failure monitoring circuit 90: Sound emission control device 91 ... sound emission control board 92 ... MPU
93 ... ROM
93a ... effect pattern table storage area 93b ... variation display pattern table storage area 94a ... various flag storage areas 94b ... various counter areas 94c ... lottery counter area 100 ... display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
533, 633, 733, 833, 933, 1033, 1233, 1333 ... first starting port 1410, 1510 ... electric combination

Claims (4)

A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails provided on the surface of the gaming board to change the distribution of gaming balls;
A mark that defines an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board;
A game machine characterized by comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The gaming machine, wherein the mark defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
It has a ball entry member provided below the nail and forming a ball entry where game balls can enter.
The gaming machine, wherein the mark is provided on the ball entry member. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
When viewed from a predetermined direction, the mark is parallel to the nail, and at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail.

Images